JP7387444B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

2. Description of the Related Art In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, a technique has been proposed in which a vibrating means is provided in a ball firing handle (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-38019

In the technique described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in improving the interest of the performance using vibrations.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the game's interest when performing effects using vibrations.

(A) To achieve the above purpose,
A gaming machine that displays a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Operation means (for example, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by the player;
A performance control means (such as a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
After starting the reach performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.),
A first timing (for example, timing AKT11) corresponding to the start of the variable display at which the reach effect is executed, and a second timing (for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03) before the start of the variable display at which the reach effect is executed. It is possible to execute a predetermined vibration effect in which the operating means is vibrated at a plurality of timings including (for example, execution of a vibration effect at timings AKT01 to AKT03 and AKT11),
It is possible to execute a special vibration effect in which the operating means is vibrated during a specific effect period that is an execution period of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect during a period AKZ01 to AKZ05),
The special vibration performance can be performed at a third timing during the specific performance period and at a fourth timing after the third timing during the specific performance period,
As the special vibration performance,
A first special vibration performance (for example, vibration pattern AKV41) corresponding to the operation of a movable body for performance different from the operation means can be executed during the specific performance period,
A second special vibration performance (for example, vibration pattern AKV42) corresponding to the image display can be executed during the specific performance period,
When the predetermined vibration presentation is executed than when the predetermined vibration presentation is not executed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation section presentation pattern, etc.);
The predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance have a first performance mode (for example, a vibration performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light) as common performance modes. , a second presentation mode (for example, a vibration presentation in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light);
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the first timing, the rate at which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher when it is executed in the second effect mode than when it is executed in the first effect mode. is high,
When the special vibration effect is executed at the third timing, the rate at which the special vibration effect is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher when executed in the second effect mode than when executed in the first effect mode. is high,
It is more advantageous when the predetermined vibration effect is executed in the first effect mode at the first timing than when the special vibration effect is executed in the second effect mode at the third timing. It is highly controlled by the state;
The predetermined vibration performance and the first special vibration performance are different in form (for example, the vibration patterns shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3),
The predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different modes (for example, the vibration patterns shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3),
The first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance have different modes (for example, the vibration patterns shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3),
The performance control means is
When the player's operation on the operation means is not valid, the player's line of sight is different from the manner in which the player's operation on the operation means is prompted when the player's operation on the operation means is valid. is capable of executing a line-of-sight guiding effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a line-of-sight guiding effect that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B, etc.);
It is possible to perform a light emission effect that causes the operation means to emit light (for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light according to the light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern),
The light emitting mode in the light emitting effect is varied depending on the timing of vibrating the operating means (for example, the light emitting mode is different depending on the timing when the variable display starts and the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game's interest when performing effects using vibrations.
(1) In order to achieve the above purpose, it is possible to control the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and also to make it possible to control the normal state and a special state that is easier to control to the advantageous state than the normal state (for example, , a time-saving state (a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state)), the game machine (e.g., pachinko game machine 1) is capable of being controlled by a player with an operating means (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.), and the vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, including a predetermined vibration effect (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (for example, a variable display effect control pattern). (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 based on the included vibration control data) (for example, the vibration effect execution means that can execute the step using the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) (e.g. CPU 120 for effect control that executes the variable display effect processing in S172), and a light emitting effect that causes the operation means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration effect (for example, a lever lamp 9B1 and a button lamp according to a light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern) 9B2 light emission, etc.) (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203, etc.) ), and specific performance execution means (for example, variable display performance control determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (a performance control CPU 120, etc.) that executes the variable displaying performance process in step S172 based on the pattern, and when the predetermined vibration performance is executed is better than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is high (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation part performance pattern, etc.), and the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance and the timing at which the predetermined vibration performance is executed. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the conditions (e.g., the luminous color included in the operation section performance pattern and the jackpot reliability depending on the application of the operation section performance pattern, etc.), and the vibration performance execution means The special vibration performance can be performed along with the execution of the performance (for example, the vibration performance during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance (for example, the vibration pattern AKV41 to AKZ05). Vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, etc. that are different from AKV44),
A predetermined vibration effect can be performed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode (here, the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12).
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, an updating means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13);
Adjustment means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21) that adjusts the speed of awarding gaming value to be provided in a unit period to decrease when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. (a part in which the CPU 103 lengthens the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the ball release state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball release state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table according to the identified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. (a part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Furthermore, according to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment to reduce the speed of awarding the gaming value is executed, so when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the It is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high due to the provision of excessive gaming value, and performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game. You can improve.

Moreover, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the invention according to the following means 2. Conventionally, in gaming machines, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-83580, a predetermined number of changes are made to a high probability state (variable probability state), which is a special state that is easily controlled to a jackpot state, which is an advantageous state than the normal state. There are gaming machines that are controlled over the number of times they are displayed.

However, by the time the high probability state (variable probability state) ends, the advantageous state (jackpot state) that is controlled again to the high probability state (variable probability state) repeatedly occurs, and a large amount of game balls, which are game media, are sold out for a short period of time. There is a problem in that there are cases where the bonus is given in advance, and there is a fear that the gambling desire of the player may be excessively aroused.

This invention was made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent excessive gaming value from being given in a short period of time and the gambling aspect from becoming excessively high. purpose.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it also has a normal state and a special state that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state, etc.). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a low-accuracy/high-base state)),
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, an updating means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13);
Adjustment means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21) that adjusts the speed of awarding gaming value to be provided in a unit period to decrease when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. (a part in which the CPU 103 lengthens the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the ball release state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball release state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table according to the identified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. (a part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to reduce the speed of awarding gaming value, so when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, excessive It is possible to prevent the gambling element from becoming excessively high due to the addition of gaming value, and it is also possible to perform performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. .

Note that this invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention, or it may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of stop symbol determination processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting regarding a setting suggestion production execution determination table. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example and a setting example regarding a setting suggestion pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine concerning feature part 10SH. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine related to the feature section 10SH. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of vibration performance and jackpot reliability. It is a figure which shows an example of the execution timing of a vibration production and a line-of-sight guidance production, and a production period. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation of a vibration performance and a line-of-sight guidance performance. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a presentation device regarding characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting when performing an operation part production pattern and a specific interlocking production. It is a figure showing the setting contents of a vibration pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of an effect by vibration and light emission. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a continuous performance pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a performance control pattern. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a timing at which an operation section effect can be executed. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a figure which shows the control example of the operation part performance. It is a diagram showing an example of execution of an effect that causes a game effect lamp to emit light. It is a diagram showing an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure showing an example of performance execution when a reach performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of music reproduction execution. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read notice effect. It is a figure which shows the update example of a 1st pending storage display area and a 2nd pending storage display area. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable body control timer. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach α1 being off and super reach α2 being off. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach β1 jackpot and super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in variable display of super reach β1 being off and super reach β2 being off. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable object suggesting motion and the image enlargement rate in each enlarged display period. (A) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of each movable body motion suggestion presentation, and (B) is a diagram showing a presentation mode of each movable body motion suggestion presentation. It is a figure which shows the performance mode up to the reach performance in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach production in the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine of the characteristic part 162SG. (A), (B), and (C) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the variable display time of each variation pattern and the ball release state flag. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the performance control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing in the pachinko gaming machine of the feature section 162SG. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control in the pachinko gaming machine of the feature section 162SG. (a) is a flowchart showing an example of a ball release state determination process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball release state flag value and each adjustment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random value determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the progress of the jackpot and the opening/closing situation of the jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball release state flag value and each period in the jackpot state. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a jackpot (excluding probability variable jackpot C), and (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display pattern determination ratio for the pending memory of a loss. It is. (A) is a diagram showing a first pending storage display area and a second pending storage display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of updating the first pending storage display area and the second pending storage display area. . 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of preview production decision processing. It is a diagram showing tables A to C for determining the type of preview performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table for failure. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for failure selected according to the value of the ball release state flag.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the left and right lower sides of the game area), general winning holes 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects, etc. are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) that is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the first prize winning hole and the second prize winning hole (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is determined by the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the first and second prize openings (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. It is a percentage. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc., are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value has been assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation of features related to setting suggestion effects)
Hereinafter, the characteristic parts regarding the setting suggestion performance in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. In this characteristic part, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate while the variable display is being executed.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of the production control process process as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S201). In the stop symbol determination process, a combination of decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative symbols, such as the final stop symbol in the variable display of decorative symbols, is determined. Following the stop symbol determination process, a preview performance determination process is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination process allows the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance to be determined.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special symbol variation performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling various performance executions. For example, in response to a variation pattern indicated by a variation pattern designation command, one of a plurality of prepared special symbol variation performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used. Further, one of the plurality of prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in accordance with the determination result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. In addition, the performance control pattern at the time of special figure change and the advance notice performance control pattern are not limited to those that set separate performance control patterns, but one performance control pattern that corresponds to the combination of execution settings of each performance. There may be.

When the production control pattern is determined in step S203, for example, the initial stage of the production control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (production control timer setting section, etc.) corresponds to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. A value is set (step S204). Further, settings are made to start changing decorative patterns and the like on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the production control pattern (special figure variation production control pattern) determined in step S203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Subsequently, the pending display update setting at the time of starting the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the hold display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display area corresponding to the hold number "1" (leftmost display area) is erased (disappeared), and other hold numbers "2" to The pending display in the display area corresponding to "4" etc. is moved (shifted) to the left one by one. As a result, the pending display is shifted. The active display section provided on the screen of the image display device 5 may display an active display corresponding to the pending display that has been erased (expired) in the pending display area. In addition, if the number of pending memories is "0" and the variable display starts immediately based on the occurrence of the first starting prize or the second starting winning, the active display area will not be updated without updating the pending display. Settings may be made to update the active display in . Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stop symbol determination process. In the stop symbol determination process, it is determined whether a super reach effect is to be executed (step S221). Whether or not the super reach effect is executed can be determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the super reach effect is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop symbol at the time of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop symbol determination process is ended. When there is no reach, the variable display result will be "losing". At the time of normal reach, there are cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result is a "loss". When the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is not a ready-to-reach mode, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reachable combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol at the time of non-reach is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have different (inconsistent) decorative symbols. At the time of a normal reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. The final stop symbol at the time of reach loss is determined so that the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R have the same (matching) decorative symbol. At the time of normal reach when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determined decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot. The final stopped symbol at the time of a jackpot is determined so that the same (matching) decorative symbol is displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop symbol at the time of super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of super reach, there are cases where the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and cases where the variable display result becomes a "loss". At the time of super reach where the variable display result is "lose", the determined decorative symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of reach loss. At the time of a jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol at the time of the jackpot.

At the time of super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "loss", the same (matching) decorative pattern will be displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. It will be stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such reach-loss combinations and jackpot combinations are also referred to as reach-to-reach symbols. Decorative patterns that can be determined as ready-to-reach symbols may include a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as seven types of decorative patterns corresponding to numbers 1 to 7, for example. The decorative pattern corresponding to the number may be only a presentation image showing the number, or may be a presentation image showing various characters in addition to the number. The ready-to-win symbol is determined to be one of a plurality of decorative symbols by referring to the ready-to-reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the ready-to-win symbol. Just do it like this. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the ready-to-win symbol may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may vary depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot." For example, when the variable display result is a "lose", the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is highest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As it becomes, the determination rate of the decorative pattern becomes lower, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of the decorative patterns corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the number 2, the number 3, the number 4, the number 5, and the number 6. As the number increases, the determination rate of the decorative pattern increases, and the determination rate of the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 becomes the highest. With such a determination ratio setting, when the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the percentage of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state becomes the highest, and 6 , 5, 4, 3, and 2, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" when it is stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is low. Therefore, the variable display result when the decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-win pattern becomes a "jackpot", and the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state becomes the lowest. In addition, in the ready-to-win symbol determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the decorative symbols that are ready-to-win symbols may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "lose" or "jackpot". The number of judgment values assigned may be different for each decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern, or the number of judgment values allocated may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes a ready-to-win pattern. Depending on the jackpot type, the determination ratio of decorative symbols that become reach symbols may be different.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If the ready-to-reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance is determined depending on whether or not the setting suggestion performance is to be executed (step S225). Whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect. All you have to do is make it so. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the execution of the setting suggestion effect may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance is determined to be either "no performance", which does not execute the setting suggestion performance, or "with performance", which executes the setting suggestion performance.

Based on the determination result in step S225, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed (with effect) (step S226). If it is determined that the setting suggestion performance is not executed (step S226; No), the stop symbol determination process is ended. If it is determined that "with effect" (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S227). The performance control CPU 120 receives the setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, and stores the notified setting value in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Thereby, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 may be specified.

Following step S227, a setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and then the stop symbol determination process is ended. The setting suggestion pattern is selected from among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared based on numerical data indicating random values for setting suggestion pattern determination. It would be better if it were decided accordingly. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated as long as it can be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-3 shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion effect execution determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA01 shown in FIG. 10-3 as a setting suggestion effect execution determination table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of setting suggestion performance is determined by referring to the determination table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of determination values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance differs depending on whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination ratio of "with effect" for performing the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "loss". With such setting of the determination ratio, when the setting suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher than when the setting suggestion performance is not executed. In addition, in the setting suggestion performance execution determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of the setting suggestion performance may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "loss" or a "jackpot". .

FIG. 10-4(A) shows a configuration example of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as the plurality of setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether or not to change the symbol display color and the display color when changing. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, and can be changed to a suggested display color including copper, silver, and gold in addition to red, which is the normal display color. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, indicating that the set value is 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, indicating that 6 is the highest set value. In this manner, in the setting suggestion performance using the ready-to-reach symbols, it is possible to make suggestions regarding the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1, depending on whether the symbol display color has changed or not, and the symbol display color after the change.

FIG. 10-4(B) shows a setting example regarding the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, the ROM 121 stores in advance table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in FIG. 10-4(B) as a setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stop symbol determination process, a setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are parts where the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed, since the ready-to-win symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is high. When the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation level, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, is low, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is 2 or more. One thing is certain. Furthermore, when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player, and when the setting suggestion performance is executed in pattern RE-3, the setting value is the highest. It is confirmed that it is 6. In this way, when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the reach mode includes a symbol display mode that gives a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative symbol corresponding to a number other than 7, and a 7. It includes a pattern display mode that provides suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state, such as decorative patterns corresponding to numbers, and also provides suggestions regarding the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1. If the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the symbol display color is changed after the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. Suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state will be continuously made, and suggestions regarding the setting values will be made.

The setting suggestion performance can be executed in different manners depending on the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, so the symbol display color is not changed to copper color. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display color is changed as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed to copper color. If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, so the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko game machine is 6 or not, the symbol display color is gold as the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7. The difference is whether or not it is changed.

The setting suggestion effect is instead of changing the display color of a decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol, or in addition to changing the display color of a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed as a ready-to-reach symbol. Any aspect of the reach aspect, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative pattern, may be changed. Alternatively, the display of background images, outer frame images, and other arbitrary performance images, the output of audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting of decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, the operation of movable performance members, and the like, It may be possible to change the performance mode by an arbitrary performance device, such as a combination of some or all of them. Setting suggestion effects and other arbitrary effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be performed using arbitrary data related to effect control, arbitrary data not related to effect control, or data that is a combination of these, predetermined for execution of the effect. It only needs to be executable when one or more conditional expressions are satisfied. The effect of changing the symbol display color is also referred to as a change effect.

The plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when controlled to a jackpot gaming state and patterns that can be determined even when not controlled to a jackpot gaming state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 can be determined at a predetermined rate even if the variable display result is a "loss", whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 can be determined with a variable display result. It may be possible to make a determination at a predetermined rate only when the result is a "jackpot", and to make it impossible to determine when the variable display result is a "loss". In this case, pattern RE-2 is determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 is determined at a common ratio regardless of the setting value set in pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined at different rates depending on the set value.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of the performance control process process as the variable display process. In the variable display production process, it is determined whether or not a special figure variation time, which is a variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern, has elapsed, based on the timer value of the production control process timer, for example (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various effects as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting process. This command is transmitted to the display control unit 123, audio control board 13, lamp control board 14, etc. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are turned on, turned off, or blinked. It is only necessary that a predetermined performance device can perform various performances by operating a movable member for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is a preview performance period (step S242). If it is the preview performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the preview performance (step S243). If it is not the preview performance period (step S242; No), or after performing the control in step S243, it is determined whether it is the ready-to-reach performance period (step S244). If it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the ready-to-win effect (step S245). By the control in step S245, when executing the ready-to-win effect after changing the symbol display color after the decorative symbols that become ready-to-win symbols are stopped and displayed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are made, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Suggestions regarding setting values can be made.

If it is not the ready-to-win performance period (step S244; No), or after performing the control in step S245, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be predetermined as an execution period of a performance that changes the symbol display color when a setting suggestion performance using a ready-to-win symbol is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No), or after the control in step S247 is performed, the decorative pattern may be changed in other ways based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, for example. After performing control to execute the effect during the variable display including the display operation (step S248), the effect processing during the variable display is ended.

The change performance period may be set to different lengths of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change effect period is set to the shortest first period, and in the case of pattern RE-1, the change effect period is set to the second period, which is longer than the first period, and pattern RE- In the case of pattern 2, the change effect period may be set to a third period which is longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change effect period may be set to the longest period, the fourth period. Generally, when a performance that informs an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player takes an image or video of that performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player, and posts it on SNS (Social Media). They tend to post on membership-based websites such as Networking Service) and Internet video supply sites. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous effect is short, a problem arises in that an appropriate photographing time cannot be secured. On the other hand, effects that are often performed even in unfavorable situations (unfavorable effects) do not stimulate the desire to take pictures, so if the unfavorable effects are carried out for a long time, they may end up making players feel uncomfortable. There is a problem. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to secure the shooting time, and the execution period of disadvantageous effects is made shorter than that of advantageous effects to reduce discomfort. Thereby, when a performance advantageous to the player is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from missing it, and it is also possible to secure time for taking pictures. Further, by securing the shooting time, the captured images and videos can be made public by the players on the Internet, and the public's interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be increased. In addition, in many cases, the photos taken at which pachinko machine 1 in which gaming parlor are made public, and from the perspective of the gaming parlor, the player is advertising the gaming parlor. become. In this way, by securing the photographing time when a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only to the players but also to the game parlor side.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time has elapsed, if a predetermined time elapses without receiving a symbol confirmation command, a predetermined error process will be executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may also do so. When the symbol confirmation command is received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (confirmed ornamental symbol) that will be the display result in the variable display of decorative symbols (step S250). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S251). Further, after updating the value of the production process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S252), the variable display production process is ended.

FIG. 10-6 shows an example of execution of setting suggestion effect. FIG. 10-6(A) shows an example of performance execution HD101 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is in a ready-to-win mode and a ready-to-win is achieved. Decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, whereby a reach is established and a reach effect of normal reach is executed. FIG. 10-6(B) shows a performance execution example HD102 in which the reach performance of normal reach becomes a reach development that transitions to the reach performance of super reach. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reduced size, and the effect image in the reach effect of super reach is displayed. FIG. 10-6(C) shows a performance execution example HD 103 in which a change performance that is a setting suggestion performance is executed. A production display corresponding to the change production is displayed superimposed on the reach-to-reach symbol that is being stopped and displayed. Furthermore, a suggestion to change the symbol display color is made by displaying an effect image that notifies the user of a message such as "Change symbol display color!!".

FIG. 10-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the symbol display color does not change due to pattern RE-0. FIG. 10-6 (D2) shows an effect execution example HD112 in which the symbol display color changes to copper color by pattern RE-1. FIG. 10-6 (D3) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to silver according to pattern RE-2. FIG. 10-6 (D4) shows an effect execution example HD113 in which the symbol display color changes to gold according to pattern RE-3. In the performance execution example HD111, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol does not change due to the pattern RE-0, and remains unchanged at the normal display color of red. In this way, a failed performance (falsified performance) in which the symbol display color is not changed is executed, suggesting that the level of expectation, which is a set value advantageous to the player, is low. In the effect execution example HD112, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to copper color by pattern RE-1, thereby indicating that the set value is 2 or more. In the performance execution example HD113, the display color of the ready-to-win symbol is changed to silver by pattern RE-2, which suggests that the level of expectation is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. In the effect execution example HD114, the display color of the ready-to-reach symbol is changed to gold by pattern RE-3, thereby suggesting that 6, which is the highest set value, is confirmed.

Setting suggestion effects include not only changing effects that can change the display color of the reach symbols, but also suggesting the expected level of jackpot through arbitrary effects such as pseudo-continuous effects and look-ahead preview effects, as well as setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may also be possible to make suggestions regarding. During execution of the variable display, a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot game state. When executing any performance, there are two cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made after making suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, and cases in which suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state are continuously made and the pachinko player It may also include a case where suggestions regarding setting values of the gaming machine 1 are made. When executing an arbitrary performance, there are two cases in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then the suggestion ends, and another case in which the suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is continued and the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is concerned. It may also include a case where a suggestion is made.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, suggesting whether the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. . For example, the plurality of setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination ratios depending on whether or not setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 have been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the effect is made so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed by giving a suggestion based on the effect mode of the pattern that is determined at a high rate. It is possible to diversify the game and improve the interest in the game.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state may be made, but suggestions regarding the set values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "Jackpot", the pachinko game machine A suggestion regarding the setting value of 1 may be made. There may be cases where a suggestion regarding the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made without making any suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state.

Instead of part or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or together with some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions are made regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and is different from the jackpot gaming state. It may be something. For example, it may provide a suggestion regarding a variable probability state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as an advantageous state, a suggestion may be made depending on whether or not to be controlled regarding a state in which an arbitrary game value advantageous to the player is awarded.

(Explanation of characteristic part 10SH)
Next, the characteristic part 10SH of this embodiment will be explained.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes an operation means that can be operated by a player. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a vibration performance execution means capable of executing a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a line-of-sight guide performance execution means that can execute a line-of-sight guide performance for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a line-of-sight guidance performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine according to the feature part 10SH is expected to be controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, in the pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to control the production control CPU 120 at any one of timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols starts, timing T2 when reach is established, and normal reach after timing T1 and timing T2. The vibration effect can be executed at either timing T3 when the reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may press the push button 31B regardless of whether the timing is one of timing T1 and timing T2, or timing T3 and timing T4. It is possible to perform a vibration performance in a manner in which the vibration time and the luminous color are the same.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH does not execute the line-of-sight guidance performance at the first timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the gaze guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2.

The line-of-sight guidance performance execution means related to the feature section 10SH can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance while the line-of-sight guidance performance is being performed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance different from the vibration performance and the eye-guide performance. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance.

The vibration effect execution means related to the feature section 10SH is capable of executing a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance when a super reach performance is being executed.

The gaming machine according to the feature section 10SH includes a display means for displaying. For example, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an image display device 5 that displays various performance images.

The display of the line-of-sight guiding effect related to the characteristic portion 10SH has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information. For example, the performance image for the eye-guiding performance has a lower priority than a constant small pattern, a pending number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than a pending display, an active display, a background image, and a decorative pattern.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH, and shows the arrangement layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is formed of a translucent member, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. According to such a configuration, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light by lighting the game effect lamp 9B.

Further, the push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate by being driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is, for example, an eccentric motor in which a weight with a biased center of gravity is provided on the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided in order to provide various vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L and 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided on the left side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided on the right side of the push button 31B, and extends from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 outward to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs are built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R along the extending direction of the game effect lamps 9L and 9R.

(Substrate configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 in order to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, and produces game effects in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn on/off lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls lighting/extinguishing of the lamp. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

For example, a motor control board 130 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 in order to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits for driving the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be executed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing related to the feature section 10SH. The production control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG. 9.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol based on the variation pattern of the variable display to be executed from now on and the display result of the variable display to be executed from now on (step 10SHS1). The variation pattern and the display result are transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display and are specified by the effect control command analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop symbol is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, the lottery refers to a determination method using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. As the random number value, one of the random numbers for effect that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random number for effect updating process is used.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the vibration performance and the execution pattern of the vibration performance when executing the vibration performance (step 10SHS2). The vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration performance that is not linked to a preview performance. In the process of step 10SHS2, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the vibration production is to be executed and the execution pattern of the vibration production when executing the vibration production, using random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. decide.

In the table referenced in the lottery in step 10 SHS2, when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the vibration effect is not executed, and when the vibration effect is executed, the jackpot reliability is determined according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect. The determined value to be compared with the random number value may be assigned to the determination result of the presence or absence of the vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect so that the vibration effects are different.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain performance A is, for example, (probability that performance A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result will be a "jackpot")/{(display result Probability that effect A will be executed when is a “jackpot”) × (probability that the display result will be a “jackpot”) + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a “jackpot”) x ( Probability that the display result will not be a "jackpot")]

Therefore, in the table referred to in the lottery in step 10SHS2, the vibration effect of each execution pattern is set so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect becomes a predetermined value when the display result becomes "jackpot". It is sufficient that the probability of execution and the probability that the vibration performance of each execution pattern is executed when the display result does not become a "jackpot" are stipulated.

(Contents of vibration performance and jackpot reliability)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration performance and the jackpot reliability. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment uses execution patterns SE1 to SE1 to Multiple types of vibration effects of SE10 can be performed.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is established. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, it does not perform the vibration performance at the timing T2 when the reach is established. Furthermore, when executing the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is established, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as vibration effects at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of the execution pattern SE4 as the vibration performance at timing T2 when the reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment operates between timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when the normal reach reach performance is being executed, and timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. The vibration effect can be performed at any of the timings. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at timing T3 when the normal reach performance is being executed, it does not execute the vibration performance at timing T4 when the super reach performance is being executed. Furthermore, when executing the vibration effect at timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the vibration effect at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment is capable of executing the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 during execution of the normal reach effect. Further, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration performance of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as the vibration performance at timing T4 while the super reach performance is being executed.

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be performed while the super reach effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment is configured to control whether the variable display of decorative symbols is started at timing T1, the normal reach reach performance is being executed at timing T3, or the super reach reach performance is being executed. Regardless of whether it is the timing T4 of It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light emits red light. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light. It is. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute vibration effects of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light. It is.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment vibrates the push button 31B for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow color light regardless of the timing at which the vibration effect can be executed. It is possible to perform vibration effects. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It is possible.

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is made to emit white light. The reliability of the jackpot is higher when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result is a "jackpot". will be notified definitively.

According to such a configuration, when the push button 31B vibrates, it is possible to draw attention to what color the push button 31B emits light and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and when the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is pushed. When a vibration effect in which the button 31B emits red light is executed, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the execution timing of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols starts than when executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. Highly reliable jackpot. In addition, even if the vibration effect is the same, it is more effective when executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed than when executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. , the reliability of the jackpot is high.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. In addition, if the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the predetermined reach mode when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T1, the super reach effect will be used instead of the normal reach effect at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed. It is possible to increase expectations for the vibration performance to be performed at timing T4 during execution. In fact, when the vibration effect is not executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of normal reach is being executed, expectations are further increased for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of super reach is being executed. be able to.

Note that the jackpot reliability of the vibrating performance that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach performance. In addition, if it is possible to execute multiple types of normal reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach effect, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 while the normal reach reach effect is being executed is , it is sufficient that the reliability is higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibrating effect that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach effect is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the super reach effect. In addition, if it is possible to perform multiple types of super reach reach effects and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of super reach reach effect, the vibration effect jackpot that can be executed at timing T4 while the super reach reach effect is being executed. The reliability only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the super reach reach performance being executed at that time, or higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of super reach reach performance.

According to such a configuration, a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being performed, or a vibration performance that can be performed at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being performed, can be used as a chance-up performance. can do.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when reach is established, the vibration effect is always executed in such a manner that the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. This will definitely notify you that the displayed result will be a "jackpot".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is established, rather than at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In fact, when the vibrating effect is not executed at the timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started, expectations for the vibrating effect to be executed at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved can be further increased.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the variable display of decorative symbols progresses, expectations for the execution of the vibration effect can be changed in a complex manner.

Furthermore, the probability that a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light is sufficiently low compared to the probability that other types of vibration effects will be executed. By specifying this, it is possible to increase the interest when it is definitely announced that the display result will be a "jackpot".

Further, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated as a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always made to emit light.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, and it is possible to increase the chances of making the user recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, after that, according to the determination result in step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 controls the timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed and the super reach reach performance in the current variable display. It is determined whether or not the vibration effect is to be executed at any one of the timing T4 during execution (step 10SHS3).

Then, if the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect The control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guiding effect (step 10SHS4). The line-of-sight guidance performance is a performance that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the line-of-sight guide effect based on random numbers and a lottery based on a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4, the ratio of determining the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect is set regardless of which mode of the vibration effect is executed. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of the line-of-sight guidance performance at the same rate regardless of the mode of the current vibration performance.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. It is possible to perform eye-direction effects.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the vibration effect is executed, so that the interest of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

On the other hand, when performing the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when reach is established, the line-of-sight guidance performance is not performed.

Here, when the display result is derived and displayed, after the display result of "missing" is displayed, a relief effect may be executed and the true display result may be derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display has been derived and displayed and the current variable display has started, if the eye guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, There is a possibility that the previous variable display may give the misunderstanding that a relief effect is being executed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the line-of-sight guiding effect is not performed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, so it is possible to prevent such misunderstanding from occurring.

Furthermore, if the line-of-sight guide performance is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, there is a possibility that it may not be possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern has become a predetermined reach mode. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the line-of-sight guide effect is not performed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the variable display mode of the decorative pattern has become a predetermined reach mode. .

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, if the vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed ( After executing the process of step 10SHS3; No) or step 10SHS4, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether to execute other performances such as a reach performance, the mode of the performance to be executed, etc. (step 10SHS5). Specifically, whether or not various performances such as a preview performance will be performed and their mode are determined by lottery. At this time, the reliability of the jackpot is varied depending on whether or not a preview performance is performed and its mode by varying the determination ratio in the lottery according to the current display result, the current variation pattern, etc. Furthermore, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined to execute the reach effect specified by the variation pattern.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance determined to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 sets a timer value according to the special figure variation time corresponding to the current variation pattern as an initial value in the production control process timer, and also sets the type and mode of the production decided to be executed. The effect specifying data specifying the effect and the execution timing specifying timer value indicating the execution timing of the effect by comparison with the timer value of the effect control process timer are stored in a timer value storage area of the RAM 122 in association with each other. When there are a plurality of performances determined to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores performance specifying data and an execution timing specifying timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start the variable display of the decorative symbols that derive the determined final stop symbol in the manner specified by the current variation pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts variable display of decorative patterns. Note that at this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration effects and line-of-sight guide effects)
FIG. 11-5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing and performance period of the vibration performance and the eye-guide performance. As described above, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at either timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started or timing T2 when a reach is achieved. In addition, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. It is possible.

Further, as described above, the performance control CPU 120 executes the vibration performance at either timing T3 when the normal reach reach performance is being executed or timing T4 when the super reach reach performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect before that.

If the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the eye-gaze guidance performance before the vibration performance at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed, the performance control CPU 120 starts the sight-line guidance performance 4 seconds before timing T3. , the vibration effect is started at timing T3. Similarly, in the case where the production control CPU 120 of this embodiment executes the line-of-sight guide effect before executing the vibration effect at timing T4 during execution of the super reach reach effect, the line-of-sight guide effect is executed 4 seconds before timing T4. The effect is started, and when the timing T4 comes, the vibration effect is started. The production period of the gaze guidance production in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed.

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

(Example of production operation)
FIGS. 11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams illustrating an example of the production operation of the vibration production and the eye-guiding production. In this performance operation example, an example will be described in which a vibration performance is executed at timing T4 while a super reach performance is being executed.

The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach effects. The effect control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach in the reach effect of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), a background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery" is displayed as a background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the super reach effect is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced size of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed when the reach effect was established. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A), the "left" reach decorative symbol 10SH5L is a reduced version of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L when the reach is established. , and a "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R, which is a reduced version of the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R when the ready-to-win is established, are displayed.

Further, in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a small symbol display area 10SHK smaller than the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is provided. In the small symbol display area 10SHK, variable display of small symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. The effect image showing the small pattern is also referred to as a notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing a small pattern that becomes a notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing a confirmed small pattern that becomes a display result is displayed. derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, small patterns different from decorative patterns are variably displayed. During the period from the start of variable display of decorative patterns until the final decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of small patterns is continuously performed in a fixed display mode, and the small symbols disappear from the screen or are obstructed by obstacles. It will not be blocked by Therefore, the small symbol display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always visually recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK. The small symbols variably displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK are also referred to as permanent small symbols or presentation small symbols. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a plurality of identifiable patterns are displayed in a display mode that is partially or completely common to each of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern that shows numbers in the same way as a part that shows numbers in a decorative pattern. A performance image showing a type of small symbol may be variably displayed as a notification information image. Note that the small pattern may be displayed only when the decorative pattern is hidden. For example, after a variable display of a decorative pattern is displayed in a reach mode, instead of a variable display of a decorative pattern, a variable display of a small pattern is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-6(A). It may be displayed in the lower left corner of the .

Note that a fourth symbol is provided next to the special symbol, the decorative symbol, and the normal symbol, and the variable display of the fourth symbol may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is, for example, repeated display and non-display in a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth symbol display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. This is achieved by continuing display control. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth symbol, the display result in the variable display of the small symbols may be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are connected to the display screen of the image display device 5 on the right side of the gaming area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1. is located at a remote location. Therefore, the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 becomes difficult to check the display state on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the variable display of the special symbol progresses. In some cases, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current state is in progress or whether a display result has been derived. On the other hand, by performing variable display of small symbols in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to determine whether variable display is in progress or not. Whether or not a display result has been derived can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In addition, in this example, there is a pending display area 10SHH for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA for displaying an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. , is displayed. Note that when the super reach effect is being executed, the hold display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may not be displayed.

Furthermore, a pending number display area 10SHHS is provided at the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the pending number display area 10SHHS, similarly to the pending display area 10SHH, the pending number of the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure game is displayed in a specifiable manner. The display mode is that of arithmetic numerals.

Then, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the line-of-sight guide effect four seconds before timing T4 during which the reach effect of super reach is being executed. The production control CPU 120 executes a production that guides the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using a visual production effect, for example, as a gaze guidance production.

In this example, the production control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC imitating a character holding a hammer and a button image 10SHB imitating a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6(B). do.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the mode of the character image 10SHC so that the character makes an action of raising a hammer, as shown in FIGS. 11-6(B) to 11-6(D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R, as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside.

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 changes the aspect of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in FIGS. 11-7(E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns on the LEDs built in the game effect lamps 9L and 9R as shown in FIGS. Turn on the light so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the performance control CPU 120 controls the button image 10SHB when the hammer swung down by the character hits the button image 10SHB and generates a plurality of stars imitating the button image 10SHB at timing T4. The appearance of various images is changed so that the "star" effect image 10SHS of the image is scattered. In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), the performance control CPU 120 starts the vibration performance at timing T4, vibrates the push button 31B, and causes the push button 31B to vibrate. The game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned on.

Then, one second after timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 ends the eye-guide performance, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (H). After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the vibration performance and stops the vibration of the push button 31B when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance has elapsed, and the game effect lamp built in the push button 31B 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R are turned off.

Here, the push button 31B is provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, such as below the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1, for example. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player who is paying attention to the performance displayed on the image display device 5 to check the state of the push button 31B, and to check whether the push button 31B is vibrating or not, or whether the push button 31B is lit. It may be difficult to recognize whether or not the On the other hand, by performing a line-of-sight guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before the push button 31B vibrates. The vibration of the button 31B can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

It should be noted that the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set lower than that of the constant small symbol and the display of the number of reservations. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer on the back side of the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the number of reservations among the plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figure 11-7 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the small symbol always displayed in the small symbol display area 10SHK, creating an eye-guiding effect. It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a lower priority than the regular small symbol.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed on the back side of the pending number display displayed in the pending number display area 10SHHS, and the line of sight is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the guidance effect, has a lower priority than the display of the number of reservations.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect is set higher than that of the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern. This priority setting can be realized by displaying the line-of-sight guiding effect on a layer that is in front of a layer that displays a background image or a decorative pattern among a plurality of layers.

In this example, as shown in Figures 11-6(B) to 11-7(G), a character image 10SHC and a button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the "mountain scenery" background image 10SHY. It can be said that the character image 10SHC and the button image 10SHB, which are the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of "mountain scenery".

Additionally, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-6(D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. It can be said that the character image 10SHC, which is the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect, has a higher priority than the "left" ready-to-reach decorative pattern 10SH5L and the "right" ready-to-reach decorative symbol 10SH5R.

Additionally, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-6(D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R. Therefore, it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is the display of the eye-guiding effect, has a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the hold display displayed in the hold display area 10SHH, and the eye guidance effect is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the pending display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 11-6 (G), a "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and the eye-guiding effect is It can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS that is displayed has a higher priority than the active display.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance can be made conspicuous while ensuring the visibility of the small symbols and the pending number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), when the line-of-sight guide effect is being executed, the display of the line-of-sight guide effect and the display of the line-of-sight guide effect Also, small symbols and pending number display, which have high priority, are displayed brightly, and other displays are displayed darkly.

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guide performance is being performed, it is possible to better ensure the visibility of the small design and the pending number display at all times, and to make the visibility of the line-of-sight guide performance more noticeable. .

(Modified example of characteristic part 10SH)
The invention related to the characteristic part 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the process of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of whether or not to use the eye-guide effect may be set depending on which type of vibration effect is to be executed. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the current vibration performance is a vibration performance in which the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. Depending on whether it is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits a red light, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color. The presence or absence of eye-guiding effects may be determined at different ratios. Here, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light, it is easy to execute the gaze guiding effect. In addition, when a vibration effect is performed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors, the eye guidance effect is always performed. In other words, when the line-of-sight guidance performance is executed, the execution rate of the vibration performance with higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not performed. According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect with higher jackpot reliability.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance. In this case, there are multiple types of vibration performances that are linked to the preview performance, depending on the combination of the linked preview performance, the vibration duration of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the emitting color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect. The effect control CPU 120 can execute an accessory preview effect that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display that is being executed, depending on the operation mode of the movable body 32. The performance control CPU 120 can execute a vibration performance that is linked to a highly reliable accessory preview performance. This vibration effect is an effect that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance in this case should just be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked accessory preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the accessory preview performance.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute a vibration performance that is linked with other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration performance is a performance that causes the push button 31B to vibrate in synchronization with the video displayed in the preview performance, and also causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. According to such a configuration, the vibration performance can be a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, after a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination is derived, the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a specific passage gate or winning hole. By doing so, a jackpot gaming state may be started. In that case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when a game ball passing through a specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration performance that is linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery performance, and is executed in a jackpot game state. Notify that the upper limit number of rounds to be played is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. It may be definitely notified that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the gaming state is the highest number of rounds among a plurality of options. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing error notification processing. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the production control board 12, error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 is capable of displaying an error notification image corresponding to an error on the image display device 5 while executing the line-of-sight guidance performance. In that case, the display of the line-of-sight guiding effect only needs to have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error notification image can be suitably ensured even if the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed when displaying the error notification image.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different between when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to be longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed, the line-of-sight guide effect is executed and the vibration effect is executed. It can improve your interest when playing. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is made longer when the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed than when the line-of-sight guide effect is executed, even if the line-of-sight guide effect is not executed. , it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be set to a certain timing as a reference, and may be made different between a timing before the reference timing and a timing after the reference timing. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is set to 1.5 seconds at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before timing T2, based on timing T2 when reach is achieved. , timing T3 when normal reach reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when super reach reach effect is being executed, which is a timing later than timing T2, is 3 seconds. The vibration time at a timing after the reference timing may be longer than the vibration time at a timing before the reference timing. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect when the vibration presentation is executed after the reference timing.

Depending on the strength of vibration of the push button 31B, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be different. For example, there are times when the push button 31B is vibrated at a first strength and times when it is vibrated at a second strength that is greater than the first strength, and the push button 31B is vibrated at the second strength. When vibrating the push button 31B at the first strength, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect may be higher than that when the push button 31B is vibrated at the first strength. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the intensity of vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration performance and the jackpot reliability may be the same between the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate variations in the execution patterns of the vibration performances and jackpot reliability that are respectively executed in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first model and the pachinko game machine 1 of the second model. , it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration performance may be executed as a pre-read preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase opportunities to perform vibration effects.

In addition to this, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production as a pre-reading notice performance is in the first mode and in the second mode. , the jackpot reliability may be different in the variable display before execution that is the target of the pre-read notice. For example, when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance is such that it vibrates continuously for a predetermined period of time, and when it is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined period of time, To make jackpot reliability different in a variable display before execution that is a target of a look-ahead notice. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance.

Alternatively, when performing a vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance, the execution timing of the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance may be set to multiple times that can execute the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It may be possible to execute only one of the timings. For example, the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance can be performed only at timing T1 when variable display of decorative symbols is started. According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the vibration effect as a pre-read notice can be executed, the vibration effect is executed as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. It is possible to appropriately recognize that the execution has been carried out.

When performing a vibration performance as a preview performance at a timing when a vibration performance is possible as a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is being executed, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display that is being executed is announced. The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview performance may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance. For example, if it is possible to execute a vibration effect as a preview effect at timing T1 when the variable display of decorative symbols is started, the push button 31B in the vibration effect as a preview effect to foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed. The vibration time of the push button 31B is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview preview performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which it continues to vibrate for a predetermined period of time, and the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-read preview performance The mode of vibration is such that the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off over a predetermined period of time. According to such a configuration, in the case where the vibration performance as a preview performance can be executed at the timing when the vibration performance as a preview performance that foretells the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed can be executed, either It is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration effect has been executed.

When the first model of pachinko game machine 1 and the second model of pachinko game machine 1 which is different from the first model have the same vibration performance execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the vibration effect is executed at a specific timing. Regarding the vibration effect, even if the mode of the vibration effect executed on the first model pachinko game machine 1 and the mode of the vibration effect executed on the second model pachinko game machine 1 are different, the jackpot cannot be won. The reliability may be the same. For example, regarding the vibration performance executed at timing T2 when reach is established, the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the specific performance executed in the first model pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model pachinko gaming machine 1 Even if the light emitting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance to be executed is different, the jackpot reliability is assumed to be 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the model of the pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect to be performed at that time, for example, if the eye-guide effect is not performed. For example, when executing a notification effect to notify that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is used to vibrate the push button 31B during a period in which the video of the notification effect is displayed. According to such a configuration, even when the line-of-sight guide performance is not performed, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the performance being executed at that time, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model have the same execution pattern and jackpot reliability, vibrations of the same execution pattern can be used. Regarding the production, only the lower limit value of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed. According to such a configuration, for example, when a vibration performance is executed as a performance to increase the chance of another performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance can be flexibly adjusted in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other performance. While making adjustments, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executable at a timing different from timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a ready-to-win mode, the production control CPU 120 temporarily stops displaying decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination, and then temporarily stops displaying the decorative symbols of a predetermined ready-to-win combination that is not a jackpot combination. It is possible to perform an inciting performance that incites development into a reach mode. After the promotion effect is executed, there are cases in which the reach mode is developed with high reliability of jackpot, and cases where the display result becomes "miss" without developing into the reach mode with high reliability of jackpot. When developing into a ready-to-win mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 executes a successful promotion performance that notifies the development of a ready-to-win mode with high jackpot reliability as a result of the promotion performance. On the other hand, if the display result is "miss" without developing into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability, the performance control CPU 120 notifies that the reach mode with high jackpot reliability will not develop as a result of the promotion performance. Execute the inciting failure performance. In executing such an inciting effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing of executing the inciting success effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest when the successful inciting effect is executed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the successful stimulation performance may be adjusted to match the image of the successful stimulation performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest when the successful inciting effect is executed.

The emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance that can be executed at the timing of executing the inciting success performance is the vibration of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration performances of multiple types of execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. The push button 31B in the presentation may have the same luminescent color as the luminescent color. According to such a configuration, when a successful inciting performance is executed, there is a possibility that the display result will be a "miss" even if the reach mode develops into a reach mode with high jackpot reliability. It is possible to prevent it from increasing.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration performance at the timing immediately before stopping and displaying the fixed decorative symbol that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. According to such a configuration, it is possible not only to improve the interest at the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, but also to increase expectations for the vibration performance itself, and to prevent the vibration performance from being performed at other timings as well. It can improve your interest when playing.

When the first model of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second model of pachinko gaming machine 1 different from the first model have the same vibration performance execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the advantage to the player is Even in the case of a "jackpot" of a jackpot type different from the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different numbers, the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration production can be "rainbow color". do. According to such a configuration, when the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect becomes "rainbow color", it is possible to avoid giving the misunderstanding that it is a "jackpot" of the jackpot type with the highest advantage. It can be done.

If there are only two types of advantages for the player depending on the jackpot type, an execution pattern in which the emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration performance is "rainbow color" may not be provided. According to such a configuration, even though the push button 31B emits light in a "rainbow color" in the vibration performance, it is possible to prevent a "jackpot" of a jackpot type that has a low advantage to the player, It is possible to prevent expectations for the vibration performance from being impaired.

The performance control CPU 120 may guide the player's line of sight to the push button 31B by using an auditory performance effect as a gaze guidance performance. For example, the production control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound effect when a vibration production is being performed, and then gradually increases the volume of the specific sound effect from a low volume to a high volume as a line-of-sight guidance production. Output as it changes. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw the attention of a player who has difficulty recognizing the line-of-sight guiding performance using visual performance effects to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

If the configuration is such that the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, even if the vibration performance has the same execution pattern, the first setting value and the second setting value different from the first setting value may be used. The jackpot reliability of the vibration performance of the execution pattern may be different depending on the time. For example, even if the vibration effect has the same execution pattern, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". . According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is a "jackpot", it is possible to increase expectations that the set value is highly advantageous.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the set value, the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be changed depending on the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value. The vibration time and emitted light color may be different. According to such a configuration, the set value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, when the setting value is any one of "1" to "3", and when the setting value is any one of "4" to "6", the push button 31B in the vibration effect is It is sufficient if the vibration time and emitted light color are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the high setting is likely to be the setting value "6" which is most advantageous for the player. Further, for example, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different depending on whether the set value is an odd number or an even number. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest by the vibration effect whether or not the set value is an even number, which may be the set value "6" that is most advantageous to the player.

At timing T2 when reach is achieved, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. It may also be possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted. According to such a configuration, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, it is possible to draw attention not only to the execution of the vibration effect but also to the manner in which the vibration effect is executed.

At timing T2 when reach is achieved, the push button 31B vibrates for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B emits white light, and the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B lights up in red. If it is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the light is emitted, the vibration effect is executed at both timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when reach is established. There may be cases where In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T1 or timing T2, the vibration at timing T1 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T2 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in rainbow colors. Even if the vibration effect is not executed, it is possible not only to increase expectations for the vibration effect to be executed at timing T2 when reach is established, but also to further increase attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T2. .

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed and timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted in a rainbow color is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the vibration at timing T3 is not executed. The combination of the performance execution pattern and the vibration performance execution pattern at timing T4 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result will be a "jackpot". According to such a configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 while the normal reach effect is being executed, the vibration effect causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit rainbow-colored light. Even if the effect is not executed, it is possible to not only increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the super reach reach effect is being executed, but also to draw more attention to the aspect of the vibration effect at timing T4. can be increased.

The vibration duration and vibration mode of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B may be different from those shown in FIG. For example, the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that definitively notifies that the display result is a "jackpot" is different from the vibration duration of the push button 31B in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot." The vibration time is longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B. Alternatively, in a vibration presentation that does not definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot," the vibration mode of the push button 31B is monotonous, but it definitely reports that the display result is a "jackpot." In the vibration effect, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with a predetermined beat. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the vibration performance that definitively notifies the player that the display result is a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when the normal reach effect is being executed or at timing T4 when the super reach effect is being executed, the line-of-sight guidance effect may be always executed. According to such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means is suitably recognized to appropriately increase the feeling of expectation that the displayed result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of the reach effect. be able to.

When performing a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, a timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed; The vibration effect may be made possible to be performed at any one of the timing T4 and the time when the super reach effect is being executed. In that case, the vibration time and emitted light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 are lower than the vibration time and emission color of the push button 31B in the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. In other words, the timing T3 is set so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T3 and timing T4 does not fall below the jackpot reliability of the vibration effects executed at timing T1 and timing T2. Alternatively, the execution pattern of vibration effects that can be executed at timing T4 may be limited. For example, when the vibration effect of execution pattern SE2 is executed at timing T1, the vibration effect of execution pattern SE5 is executed at timing T3, and the vibration effect of execution pattern SE8 is executed at timing T4; limit. According to such a configuration, when the vibration performance is executed a plurality of times in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the credibility of the jackpot reliability from being lowered.

When it is possible to perform a vibration performance that is linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration performance that is linked to the preview performance may be different from the mode of the vibration performance that is not linked to the preview performance. For example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to the accessory preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in accordance with the sound effect when the accessory moves. Further, for example, in a vibration performance linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is caused to emit light in a color different from that of the push button 31B in a vibration performance not linked to a preview performance. According to such a configuration, when a vibration performance is executed, it is possible to easily recognize whether the vibration performance is linked to a preview performance or not linked to a preview performance. .

It may also be possible to perform a present box effect. In this case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer as shown in FIG. 11-6(B) may pop out from the opened present box, and a line-of-sight guiding effect may be performed. According to such a configuration, since the present box effect is executed, it is possible to increase expectations for the execution of the line-of-sight guidance effect and the vibration effect.

When it is possible to perform an operation effect that causes the push button 31B to be operated, in this operation effect, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid during the operation validity period in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, The push button 31B may be turned on. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the manner in which the push button 31B is lit in the vibration effect. For example, when lighting the push button 31B for a vibration effect, the control may be such that the push button 31B emits red light continuously for 3 seconds while the push button 31B vibrates, resulting in a lighting mode for the vibration effect. . On the other hand, when lighting the push button 31B in the operation performance, the button operation switches the push button 31B between red light emission (lighting up) and non-light emission (lighting out) every 150 milliseconds during the operation validity period. It may be controlled to have a lighting mode for suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. Note that during the valid lever operation period in which the operation of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operation lever of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to notify that the operation of the operation lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A emits light during the valid lever operation period to provide a lighting mode for suggesting a lever operation. The lighting mode for suggesting a lever operation may be the same lighting mode as the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation, or may be a lighting mode different from the lighting mode for suggesting a button operation.

For example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like can be operated by the player to, for example, set the volume of the effect to be executed, set the type of music and background to be output, and display images. Settings related to effects, such as the brightness setting of the device 5 and the brightness settings of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, may be changeable. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which production setting to change from the menu screen, or a different operation may be performed depending on the change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. You can do it like this. Further, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be turned on in order to notify that the settings related to the performance can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the vibration production and the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation production. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably notify that the settings regarding the performance can be changed.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 10SH)
In relation to the characteristic portion 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, (Refer to Publication No. 2019-051075).

Generally, a player plays a game while viewing a display means on which a variable display or various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, even if a vibration effect is executed, the player may not be able to recognize that the operating means is vibrating. In that case, it is not possible to sufficiently increase the interest through vibration effects.

Therefore, in order to attract attention to the gaming means before the vibration performance is executed and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature section 10SH is a game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. A machine (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player), and an operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player). includes a push button 31B that can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button, etc.), and a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operating means vibrates (for example, the performance control CPU 120 includes a push button 31B (e.g., the CPU 120 for controlling the effect is capable of executing a vibrating effect in which the player vibrates), a line-of-sight guiding effect executing means capable of executing a line-of-sight guiding effect that guides the player's line of sight to the operating means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (e.g., it is possible to execute a line-of-sight guide effect that guides the line of sight to the push button 31B), and the control is controlled to be in the advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. (For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the jackpot reliability is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.), and the vibration effect execution means is , the vibration effect can be executed at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started). , timing T2 when reach is established, timing T3 after timing T1 and timing T2 when normal reach reach effect is being executed, and timing when super reach reach effect is being executed. T4, etc.), the vibration effect can be performed in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. can be executed (for example, the production control CPU 120 can perform the following regardless of whether it is at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or at any one of timing T3 and timing T4). (first, the vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time of the push button 31B and the emitted light color are the same); For example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the eye-gaze guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at the second timing (such as not executing the gaze-guidance performance at timing T1 and timing T2, etc.). , the performance control CPU 120 is characterized by being able to execute the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is executed at timing T3 and timing T4, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the operating means before the vibration performance is executed, and to sufficiently increase the interest of the vibration performance.

In the gaming machine of the means 2 according to the feature part 10SH, in the gaming machine of the means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the line of sight guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control The CPU 120 may be configured to be able to perform a vibration effect while the line-of-sight guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, a sense of unity is created between the vibration performance and the line-of-sight guidance performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine of means 1 or 2, the gaming machine of the means 3 related to the feature part 10SH has a specific performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 , a super reach reach effect, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 (For example, it is possible to perform a vibration effect while a super reach effect is being executed).

According to such a configuration, since the vibration effect may be executed when the specific effect is being executed, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 10SH is a display means for displaying in any of the gaming machines of the means 1 to 3 (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an image display device 5 for displaying various effect images). ), and the display of the line-of-sight guidance effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information, and has a higher priority than the display of information different from the predetermined information (for example, the display of the line-of-sight guide effect has a lower priority than the display of predetermined information). may have a lower priority than a small symbol, a pending number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than a pending display, an active display, a background image, a decorative symbol, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the line-of-sight guidance effect is being performed, it is possible to suitably ensure the visibility of the predetermined information while making the visibility of the line-of-sight guide effect noticeable.

The gaming machine of the means 5 according to the characteristic part 10SH is the gaming machine of any one of the means 1 to 4, in which the vibration performance execution means executes the vibration performance of the first aspect and the advantageous state than the first aspect. (For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the push button 31B to vibrate for 1.5 seconds and It is possible to perform a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits white light, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and causes the push button 31B to emit red light. When a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light than when a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for 3 seconds and the push button 31B emits red light is executed. When the line-of-sight guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect of the second aspect is easier to execute than the vibration effect of the first aspect (for example, the vibration effect of the second aspect is more likely to be performed in a pachinko game). In machine 1, when the line-of-sight guiding effect is executed, the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds rather than the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is emitted white light. At the same time, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B emits red light is easier to perform, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by executing the line-of-sight guidance effect, it is possible to improve expectations for the execution of the vibration effect of the second aspect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 10SH may be combined with a part or all of the configurations related to other characteristic portions as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual feature parts that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other feature parts, as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows an example of the configuration of the presentation device regarding the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance serving as a movable performance device is provided at the front of the lower end, which is the lower edge on the front side that overlaps with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to an operating motor via a link mechanism, for example. The movable body 32 can be changed between an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operating motor. The movable body 32 may be able to change its position by, for example, power from an operating solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 includes a frame portion and a window portion. The frame portion of the movable body 32 is constructed using a decorative member, and has a structure that can be covered so that the display screen of the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by the player. The window portion of the movable body 32 is formed using transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a transparent configuration so that the player can visually check the display screen of the image display device 5. ing.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the upper frame lamp 9C, a plurality of LEDs forming the left frame lamp 9M, and a plurality of LEDs forming the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position on the left side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position on the right side of the gaming area in the gaming machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include a plurality of LEDs forming the lever lamp 9B1 and a plurality of LEDs forming the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of a plurality of LEDs built into the operation rod (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of a plurality of LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be partially or entirely formed of a translucent member. Thereby, by lighting the lever lamp 9B1, it is possible to cause the operating lever of the stick controller 31A to emit light. Further, by lighting the button lamp 9B2, the push button 31B can be caused to emit light.

For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or near the push button 31B, built into the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, or provided at the base of the operating lever. In order to diversify the vibration modes of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, a plurality of vibration motors 131 may be provided.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and an operation part performance including a light emission performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestion performance suggesting that the control is to be controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration mode according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are turned on to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with the vibration effect. In addition, in the light emission effect included in the operation section effect, by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, one of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect. Good too. For example, by lighting only the button lamp 9B2, only the push button 31B may be caused to emit light in conjunction with the vibration effect.

FIG. 12-2(A) shows a setting example of an operation section performance pattern used to execute the operation section performance. In this setting example, as a plurality of operation section performance patterns, operation section performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance. Light emitting color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and purpose are set corresponding to each operating part production pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in the light emission performance included in the operation section performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation section performance pattern shows the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled when the operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern is executed. The application corresponding to the operation section performance pattern indicates the timing at which the operation section performance is executed for each operation section performance pattern.

The operation section performance can be executed at a plurality of timings as the variable display progresses, for example, at the start of preliminary variation, at the start of target variation, at the time of establishing a reach, at the time of development of a reach, and at the time of triggering a win/fail notification. The pre-variation start time is a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion by the operation section performance. The start of the target variation is the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the target of suggestion by the operation section performance. When the reach is established, the timing corresponds to the case where the variable display becomes the reach mode. When the reach is developed, the timing corresponds to the case where the development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of the super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies that a super reach performance will be executed after a normal reach performance is executed (development of reach). The win/fail notification inciting time corresponds to the inciting performance before the win/fail notification performance that notifies whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" while executing the super reach reach effect.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 12-2(A), a plurality of operation section effect patterns that can be used to execute operation section effects according to a plurality of timings are prepared in advance. Further, it is set so that different operation section performance patterns can be used depending on a plurality of timings at which the operation section performance can be executed.

When the reach effect of super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach effect of normal reach is executed and the reach effect of super reach is not executed. It is possible to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the reach performance of super reach is executed and the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is derived. For the super reach effect, for example, a plurality of reach effects including SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances that have different performance modes from each other. Each reach performance may include a performance with a common performance mode. In order to have jackpot reliability according to each reach effect, the determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" must be set. Bye. Depending on the fluctuation pattern determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of a reach effect, the presence or absence of a super reach effect, the presentation mode of the reach effect, etc. It would be nice if it were configurable.

The operation section performance is executed at a predetermined rate depending on whether or not the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", regardless of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game, including variable displays, such as reach performances, for example. It is possible to determine the presence or absence of Such an operation part performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance is also referred to as a single operation part performance. On the other hand, in some cases, a performance is performed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light or vibrate in accordance with a specific performance. A performance using light emission or vibration that accompanies such a specific performance is also referred to as a specific interlocking performance.

FIG. 12-2(B) shows an example of settings when executing a specific interlocking effect. In this setting example, when executing a specific interlocking effect in conjunction with multiple specific effects, such as moving body movement, image display, music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, etc. Emission color and vibration pattern are set. The light emitting color in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is only necessary that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made to emit light as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set in accordance with the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient that the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is the same as the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibrations of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking performance are included in the special vibration performance that can be executed along with the execution of the specific performance. The light emission of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B in the specific interlocking effect is included in the specific light emission effect that can be executed along with the execution of the specific effect.

The reach performance of SP reach A only needs to have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type lottery CH1 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the minimum (for example, 4 rounds). The jackpot type lottery CH2 may be any lottery effect that can be executed when the second jackpot type has the maximum number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds). Incidentally, the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 may be a lottery performance regarding the jackpot type according to the presence or absence of time saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the termination conditions, or may be a drawing performance regarding the jackpot type that was announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may be a lottery effect regarding whether or not there is a rank increase and the amount of increase resulting in the number of rounds being increased from the number of rounds. As jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2, based on the game ball that entered the V-winning hole in the V-winning attacker, if it is possible to control the probability variable state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V-winning attacker is opened or not and the opening time , the number of openings, or the termination condition of probability variable control, it may be possible to execute a lottery effect regarding jackpot game states with different advantages. Based on the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, when it is possible to control from a small winning gaming state to a jackpot gaming state, whether or not the V winning winning attacker is released, the opening time, the number of openings, or, Depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of a V winning prize, it may be possible to execute a lottery performance regarding a small winning gaming state or a jackpot gaming state with different degrees of advantage.

Until the game state in which the V-winning attacker can be released is started, it is controlled to a weak vibration monitoring state, and after that, from the start of the gaming state in which the V-winning attacker can be released, the V is caused by the game ball entering the V-winning attacker. During the period until the winning occurs, the controller may be controlled to a strong vibration monitoring state, and the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. When a V winning prize occurs, the control is performed to a weak vibration monitoring state, and an effect including vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is easy to detect vibration errors, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which it is difficult to detect vibration errors than the strong vibration monitoring state. Control is performed to a strong vibration monitoring state during a period when there is a high risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations. On the other hand, during a period in which there is little risk of fraud due to the player generating vibrations, the vibration weak monitoring state is controlled. When a vibration error is detected, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of an alarm image, output of an alarm sound, lighting of an alarm lamp, output of an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality is executable. If a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be brought to a game stop state by the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100 or the like. As a result, it is possible to appropriately monitor vibrations and to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to notification of a vibration error or game stoppage due to inappropriate abnormality determination.

FIG. 12-3 shows the settings of the vibration pattern. A plurality of vibration patterns are prepared in advance depending on the vibration mode of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. FIG. 12-3(A) shows vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects. FIG. 12-3(B) shows vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration performance included in the specific interlocking performance.

The vibration pattern AKV01 has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary fluctuation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV02, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed at the start of the pre-variation. Further, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC02, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

In the vibration pattern AKV03, the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed at the start of the target variation. On the other hand, the operation section performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from the start of the target variation. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes red. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13, the emitted light color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance becomes a rainbow color.

The vibration pattern AKV11 has an on-period vibration mode that matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is achieved. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes pink.

The vibration pattern AKV12 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established. In the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light along with the vibration performance becomes orange.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when a reach is established, a performance based on a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is established may be performed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is established, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed when the reach is established and the operation part effect executed at the start of the preliminary variation or the start of the target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

The vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS1 when the reach develops. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light in accordance with the vibration performance is white.

The vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2 at the time of reach development. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach is developed. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation section performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the light emission color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is white.

Note that as the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance when the reach is developed, a performance using a vibration pattern that is common to the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is developed may be executed. For example, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 may be executable. Further, as a vibration performance included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC32 that can be executed at the time of reach development, a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 may be executable. In these cases, there will be a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation part effect executed at the time of reach development and the operation part effect executed at the start of pre-variation or target variation. . In this way, even when the timings for executing the operation section effects are different, by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common, it may be possible to prevent an increase in the control burden and control data for the effects.

In the vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period continues further until the player's action of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. I wish I could. The vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inciting the success or failure notification. On the other hand, the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emitting color in the light emission performance in which the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are made to emit light along with the vibration performance is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be changed depending on the type of effect executed in conjunction with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. good. If a valid detection period is provided, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A should be set to have a light emission mode that switches between golden light (lights on) and non-lights (lights off) every 150 milliseconds to suggest an operation. May be controlled. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, control may be performed so that the light emitting mode for the vibration effect is such that the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A emits gold light continuously over the period of vibration. On the other hand, if a valid detection period is provided, it is suggested that the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A be switched every 150 milliseconds between emitting red light (lit) and non-emitting light (lighting out) in a red color different from gold. It may be controlled to have a desired light emitting mode. By executing a light emission effect with a light emission mode that switches between light emission and non-light emission every 150 milliseconds, it can be confirmed that the operation of operating the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is effective while executing the vibration effect. , can be suggested to the player. Alternatively, a plurality of lamp layers for which lamp control data can be set may be used to give different priorities for light emission control. For example, the first lamp layer has a lighting mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between red light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights out) every 150 milliseconds as a light emission mode for normal operation suggestion. Set the lamp control data. The second lamp layer is set with lamp control data that causes the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to continuously emit gold light over an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds as a light emission mode for suggesting special operations. do. Then, the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is performed more than the light emission control of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. Execute with priority. Thereby, the light emission mode for special operation suggestion may be controlled to be preferentially used as the light emission mode for light emission effect rather than the light emission mode for normal operation suggestion.

The plurality of reach performances that become super reach may include a strong SP reach with relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with relatively low jackpot reliability. In the strong SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is executed after a motion detection performance is executed by detecting a player's motion that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of strong SP reach is executed, the vibration effect is turned on until the player's movement that is an operation on the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the effective detection period. It is sufficient if the vibration mode has a continuous period. In the weak SP reach performance, a win/fail notification performance is performed without performing a motion detection performance. When a vibration performance corresponding to such a weak SP reach performance is executed, the vibration pattern AKV31 may be activated at least 1500 milliseconds before the win/fail notification performance. Note that a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different between the operation section performance when the strong SP reach performance is executed and the operation performance when the weak SP reach performance is executed. For example, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to have a period. Alternatively, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed, the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be turned on to vibrate every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The vibration mode may be controlled to be switched between a period and an off period in which vibration is not performed. On the other hand, as a vibration effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated for 2000 milliseconds. It may also be controlled in a vibration manner. A case may be provided in which the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect when the strong SP reach effect is executed and the operation effect when the weak SP reach effect is executed. For example, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when a strong SP reach effect is executed, the control lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A will be activated to emit a golden light every 150 milliseconds during the effective detection period. The light emitting mode may be controlled to switch between (lighting up) and non-lighting (lighting out). On the other hand, as a light emitting effect included in the operation part effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, the stick controller 31A is continuously activated for 2000 milliseconds by vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. The operating lever or push button 31B may be controlled to emit a golden light.

The vibration pattern AKV41 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV42 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to the screen display in the SP reach A reach effect. The vibration pattern AKV43 has a vibration mode during the on period that is linked to music playback in the reach performance of SP reach A. The vibration pattern AKV44 has a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the movable body movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, the light emitting color in the specific light emitting effect becomes blue as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV42 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance. In the specific interlocking performance that is executed together with the image display in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. The vibration caused by the vibration pattern AKV43 becomes a special vibration performance included in a specific interlocking performance that is executed together with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with music playback in the SP reach A reach performance, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance changes from blue to red to gold as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

The vibration by the vibration pattern AKV44 may be a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot confirmation notification, or a special vibration effect included in a specific interlocking effect executed together with jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2. There are cases where this happens. In the specific interlocking effect executed together with the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emitted in the specific light emitting effect becomes a rainbow color as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH1, the light emitting color in the specific light emission performance becomes white as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate. In the specific interlocking performance executed together with the jackpot type lottery CH2, the emitted light color in the specific light emission performance becomes rainbow-colored as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B vibrate.

FIG. 12-4 shows an example of performing an effect by causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown depending on the emitted light color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B have a normal emission brightness set to a low level in the normal emission state, and the emission color is set to a low level. It is sufficient if the light is emitted in a white color. Alternatively, in the normal light emitting state, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to a non-emitting state in which they do not emit light.

A production execution example AKA01 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light. When executing the operation section performance using any of the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the emitted light color becomes white. The operation section performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. Both of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV22. Also when executing the jackpot type lottery CH1 as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes white.

A production execution example AKA02 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light. When executing the operation section effect using either the operation section effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the emitted light color becomes red. The operation section performance pattern AKC02 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC12 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The jackpot reliability of both the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC12 is 70% or more. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC02 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section effect based on the operation section pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes red is included.

A production execution example AKA03 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light. When executing the operation section performance using either of the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored. The operation section effect pattern AKC03 can be used when executing the operation section effect at the start of advance variation. The operation section performance pattern AKC13 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the start of target variation. The reliability of the jackpot is 100% for both the operation section performances using the operation section performance patterns AKC03 and AKC13. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC03 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC13 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Even when a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored.

A production execution example AKA04 is a case where a light emission production is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit pink light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21, the emitted light color becomes pink. The operation section performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV11.

Effect execution example AKA05 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit orange light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22, the emitted light color becomes orange. The operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of reach development. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV12.

Effect execution example AKV06 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit blue light. When executing the operation section effect, the emitted light color does not change to blue. When executing the movable body movement of SP Reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes blue. Furthermore, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes blue is included.

Effect execution example AKV07 is a case where a light emission effect is executed in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit gold light. When executing the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC41, the emitted light color becomes gold. The operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing the operation section performance at the time of notification of success or failure. The operation part performance based on the operation part performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV31. When displaying an image of SP reach A as a specific performance, the emitted light color becomes gold. Also, when playing the music of SP Reach A as a specific performance, a performance period in which the emitted light color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the emitted light colors of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or the same depending on the execution timing of the operation section performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode in the vibration performance. In addition to the luminous color, arbitrary luminous modes such as luminous time, luminous number (blinking number), luminous cycle (flashing cycle), and luminous brightness can also be determined by the execution timing of the operation section performance, jackpot reliability, and vibration in the vibration performance. Depending on the aspect, they may be different or common.

When executed at the start of advance variation, the operation section performance can be executed as a pre-read preview performance or a continuous preview performance. The pre-read preview performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance continuously suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" over a plurality of variable displays executed before the variable display that is the target of the suggestion. The continuous preview performance can be executed using continuous performance patterns for each number of pending memories. The number of reserved memories here may be the number of special symbols reserved at the time of starting winnings. As a continuous performance pattern for each number of pending memories, a plurality of continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special symbols stored at the time of starting winning, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display to be suggested is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

FIG. 12-5 shows an example of setting a continuous effect pattern used to execute continuous preview effects. For the continuous performance pattern, for example, using a random value for determining the continuous performance pattern, refer to the continuous performance pattern determination table according to the number of reserved memories, and depending on the winning determination result, a determined value that matches the random value is assigned. The decision may be made by determining the decision result that has been determined.

FIG. 12-5(A) shows continuous effect patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC11 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC12 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed. In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation part performance according to the operation part performance pattern AKC13 is executed. The part performance is executed.

FIG. 12-5(B) shows continuous performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "3". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is "0". When this is the case, the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 12-5(C) shows continuous effect patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of pending memories is "4". In the continuous preview performance using the continuous performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3", the operation section performance according to any of the continuous performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and the remaining number of times is one of "1" to "3". When the value is "0", the operation section performance according to any one of the continuous performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

FIG. 12-6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process that can be executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the pre-read notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-6, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that makes it possible to execute the pre-reading notice performance which is a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is determined whether or not the production control command (starting opening winning designation command, pending storage number notification command, winning determination result command) transmitted at the time of starting winning is received. If no command is received, it is determined that the prefetch notice condition is not satisfied. When a command is received, the content of the notification based on the received command is specified, and the winning determination result is specified as the notification content based on the winning determination result command, for example.

The winning determination result uses the gaming random numbers extracted at the start of winning to determine whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a specific fluctuation pattern. , the result determined by the starting winning determination process executed in step S101 of the special symbol process process may be used. The winning determination result may indicate, for example, any one of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmed in case of loss, reach confirmed in case of loss, and general in case of loss. The jackpot winning determination result corresponds to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range, and corresponds to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The determination result at the time of winning when the super reach is confirmed in the event of a loss is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and it corresponds to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the confirmed super reach in the event of a loss. This is the judgment result. The determination result at the time of winning when the reach at the time of loss is confirmed is included in the determination result corresponding to the case where the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, and the determination result corresponding to the case where the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach determined range at the time of loss. It is. In the case of a loss, the general winning judgment result is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where it is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmed range nor within the reach confirmed range at the time of loss. This is the judgment result corresponding to.

It is only necessary that the pre-reading notice condition can be established when the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a losing super reach. In addition, if the current prize winning determination result is either jackpot or loss super reach confirmed, and all previous winning prize determination results corresponding to the pending memory are all loss general. may be possible. Note that if the execution of a pre-read notice performance that is a continuous notice performance has already been set to start, a restriction may be made so that the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied.

If the pre-read notice condition is not satisfied (step AKS101; No), the pre-read notice setting process is ended. If the pre-read notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice (step AKS102). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the execution of a pre-read notice, and referring to the pre-read notice execution determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 according to the winning determination result. Whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect may be determined by determining whether or not to perform a pre-read preview effect. In step AKS102, either "not executed" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is not executed, or "with execution" in the case where the pre-read preview effect is executed is determined. Regarding the determination result at this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that "execution is to be performed" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-read preview setting process is ended. If it is determined that the pre-read preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of pending memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Subsequently, a continuous performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a continuous performance pattern, and referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared according to the winning determination result, a continuous performance pattern can be created. may be determined to be one of a plurality of patterns.

After determining the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105, a pre-read preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-read preview setting process is ended. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-read preview flag provided in a predetermined area (effect control flag setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 may be set to an on state.

In such a pre-read notice setting process, if the winning determination result is either a jackpot or a loss-winning super reach, the pre-read notice condition in step AKS101 can be satisfied, and the pre-read notice execution in step AKS102 can be performed. It becomes possible to determine the presence or absence and the continuous performance pattern based on step AKS105. Then, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, even if step AKS102 determines to execute the pre-read preview effect at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a loss and the super reach is confirmed. good. Further, in step AKS105, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate when the winning determination result is a jackpot than when the winning determination result is a loss and super reach is confirmed. In this way, it is only necessary to be able to execute a continuous preview performance that is a pre-read preview performance based on the winning determination result that is a pre-read determination result.

FIG. 12-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process that can be executed in step S171 of FIG. 9 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 12-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop symbol etc. that will be the final decorative symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (step AKS201). The production control CPU 120 displays the final stop symbol based on variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. All you have to do is decide. The fluctuation pattern designation command and the display result notification command are mainly performed by setting the command to be sent at the start of the special symbol fluctuation when the fluctuation pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special symbol process process. It is transmitted from the board 11 to the production control board 12. The variation pattern designation command is a production control command that designates the variation pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a production control command that specifies the variable display result determined using the random value for determining the special figure display result. As an example, the variable display contents depending on the combination of fluctuation patterns and variable display results include "non-reach (lose)", "reach (lose)", "non-probable variable (jackpot)", and "probable variable (jackpot)". Good to have.

If the variable display content is "Non-reach (lose)", the variable display state of the decorative symbol will not change to the reach state, and the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be It becomes a “lose”. If the variable display content is "Reach (Lose)", after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the "Reach" state, the determined decorative symbol of the Reach Loss combination will be stopped and displayed, and the display result of the variable display will be "Lose". becomes. When the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability variable (jackpot)", the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes a probability variable state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probable change (jackpot)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that are the same even numbered symbols is determined as the final stop symbol. In addition, when the variable display content is "probable change (jackpot)", it is sufficient if it is possible to determine a combination of determined ornamental symbols that are the same odd-numbered symbols as the final stop symbol. When the variable display content is "reach (lose)", a combination of fixed ornamental symbols that is a combination that is out of reach is determined as the final stop symbol. If the variable display content is "non-reach (lose)", a combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be a non-reach (loss) combination is determined as the final stop symbol. When determining a combination of fixed decorative symbols, for example, by extracting numerical data that is a random number value for determining the symbol, and referring to a symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 according to the variable display contents, What is necessary is to determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern.

After determining the final stop symbol, etc., the operation section performance is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-read preview effect is being executed. For example, if the pre-read preview flag is on, it may be determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. When the pre-read preview performance is being executed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operating section performance pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the continuous performance pattern. The continuous effect pattern determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the prefetch notice flag may be cleared to turn it off.

In step AKS202, if it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not being executed, the presence or absence of the operation section performance and the operation section performance pattern corresponding to the current variable display may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, extract numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation part performance, and refer to the operation part performance determination table stored in advance in the RAM 121 depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not. It is only necessary to be able to determine the presence or absence of the operation section performance, that is, whether or not to perform the operation section performance, and the operation section performance pattern used when executing the operation section performance. The operation part effects that are compatible with this variable display can be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is not being executed, and cannot be executed when it is determined that the pre-read preview effect is being executed. . Therefore, within the scope of the variable display where the operation part effect included in the pre-read preview effect is executed, the operation part effect corresponding to this variable display has a limit so that it cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. There are restrictions such as:

In step AKS202, when a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with a specific effect based on the variation pattern, execution of the operation part effect may be restricted. For example, when the SP reach A reach effect is executed, the execution of the operation unit effect may be limited by determining not to execute the operation unit effect at any timing. In this case, within the scope of the variable display in which the SP reach A reach effect is executed, a limit is set such that all operation section effects cannot be executed while the variable display is being executed. Alternatively, when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established, while it is possible to decide to execute the operation part effect at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of target fluctuation or when the reach is established. Execution of the operation section performance may be restricted by determining not to perform the operation section performance at the timing corresponding to the time when the success/failure notification is triggered. In this case, within the scope of the variable display where the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, a limit is set so that some operation part effects cannot be performed while the variable display is being executed. . In addition, within the scope of the variable display in which a specific performance is performed, a limit may be set so that it is difficult for some or all of the operation part performances to be performed while the variable display is being performed. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 that determines the operation section performance in step AKS202 can restrict the execution of the operation section performance including the vibration performance when the special vibration performance is executed.

In addition, in the case where the operation part performance is determined in step AKS202, when a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the winning determination result, etc., the performance is lower than when the special performance is not executed. The determination ratio of the operation section effects may be set so that some or all of the operation section effects are likely to be executed during execution of the variable display.

After determining the operation part performance, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared production control patterns (variable display production control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, and sets it as the usage pattern. . Further, the performance control CPU 120 may select one of a plurality of prepared performance control patterns (operation unit performance control patterns) in response to the operation unit performance determined in step AKS202 and set it as the usage pattern. good. Further, for example, an initial value of a performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (performance control timer setting section, etc.) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, variations of decorative patterns and the like are started on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by display control data included in the production control pattern (variable display production control pattern) determined in step AKS203 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, the image It is sufficient to start the variation of the decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the display device 5.

After setting the start of variation, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display, etc., the value of the production process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step AKS207), and then the variable display start setting process is ended.

FIG. 12-8 shows a configuration example of the production control pattern. The effect control pattern includes a variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(A) and an operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(B). The variable display effect control pattern shown in Figure 12-8(A) executes various effects from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols in response to the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command. Contains control data used to control the The operation section effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation section effect.

The variable display production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, end code, etc. . The production control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the production control process timer value, which is the stored value of the production control process timer, and is a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of each production operation. is set in advance. In addition, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, for example, the reception of a predetermined performance control command from the main board 11, or the execution of a predetermined process as a process for controlling the performance operation in the performance control CPU 120. Data indicating switching timing of production control, etc. may be set in correspondence with predetermined control content or processing content.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects and the like linked to the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern includes data indicating the light emission driving mode of the light emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs during the variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the lamp control data of the variable display effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of the light emitter during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes an effective detection period for effectively detecting the player's movements, such as a tilting operation on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A, an instruction operation on the trigger button, or a pressing operation on the push button 31B, and the effective detection period for each operation. It includes data indicating the performance operation mode according to the detection of the player's movement, such as data specifying the control contents of the performance operation when the player's movement is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes, for example, data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration motor 131 during variable display of decorative symbols. That is, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all production control patterns, but production control patterns that include some control data depending on the content of production operation by each production control pattern. There may be. Further, among the plurality of types of process data included in the production control pattern, the types of control data forming each process data may be different depending on the content of the production operation executed at each timing. In other words, some process data includes all of display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, while others include only a portion of these data. It's fine. Furthermore, various other control data such as movable body control data indicating the operation mode of the movable body 32 may be included.

In the variable display production process in step S172 of the production control process process, each time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. controls performance operations according to various types of corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps, 9, a light emitting body such as a decorative LED, a vibration motor 131, a movable body 32, etc.). In addition, in each process data #1 to process data #n, display control data #1 to display control data #n and audio control data #1 to audio control are associated with performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n. Data #n, lamp control data #1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data #1 to operation detection control data #n, and vibration control data #1 to vibration control data #n control the production operations in the production device. It composes performance control execution data #1 to performance control execution data #n that indicates the content and specifies the execution of performance control.

The operation section production control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, production control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, vibration control data, and the like. The lamp control data of the operation section performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitters in the operation section performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. That is, the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B is made to emit light in the light emission effect included in the operation section effect. The vibration control data of the operation section performance control pattern includes data indicating the ON period and driving mode of the vibration generator in the operation section performance, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131, for example. That is, the vibration control data of the operation section performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when vibrating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B in the vibration performance included in the operation section performance.

FIG. 12-9 shows an example of setting the timing at which the operation section effect can be executed in the vibration effect execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 correspond to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the preliminary variation is started, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance at the start of the preliminary variation can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation part performance is executed in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, depending on the remaining number of times. be able to. For example, when the remaining number of times is "3", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT01, and when the remaining number of times is "2", the operation part effect can be executed at timing AKT02, and the remaining number of times is is "1", the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 corresponds to the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern that becomes the target change is started, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance at the start of the target change can be executed. For example, when a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the pre-read notice setting process, the operation part according to the operation part performance pattern according to the remaining number of times is used in some or all of the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations. After executing the performance, at timing AKT11 when the target variation starts, the operation unit performance can be performed using the operation unit performance pattern according to the remaining number of times “0”. Further, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, the operation section effect may become executable. Specifically, when one of the operation section performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. be able to.

Timings such as timings AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, which correspond to the case where the variable display of decorative patterns is started, may be such that the operation section performance can be executed at the same time as the variable display of the decorative patterns is started. , the operation section effect may be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the variable display of the decorative pattern was started. In this way, the timing corresponding to the case where the variable display of the decorative symbols is started may be any timing that can be reached by starting the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in FIG. 12-9 are the operation section effects corresponding to the current variable display, including the operation section presentation when a reach is established, the operation section presentation when a reach is developed, and the operation section presentation when a win/fail notification is triggered. The timing is feasible for each. For example, depending on the operation section effect pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and the operation section effect can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach has developed. There are cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation part effect, and cases where it becomes possible to execute the operation section effect at the timing AKT14 when the success/failure notification is triggered. Specifically, when either the operation section performance pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance based on the determined operation section performance pattern is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Can be done. Furthermore, when either of the operation section performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 is determined in step AKS202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed. Alternatively, when the operation section performance pattern AKC41 is determined in step ASK202, the operation section performance according to the determined operation section performance pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is when the success/failure notification is triggered.

FIG. 12-10 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 12-10(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in FIG. 12-10(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 12-10(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-10(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is that during the on period of 300 msec, for example, the first brightness of white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low emitting brightness every 30 msec. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIG. 12-11 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 12-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-11(B), This can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of preliminary fluctuations. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 12-11(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-11(B). , can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of pre-variation. As shown in FIG. 12-11(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are continuously displayed in red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect if the operation part effect pattern AKC02 is used. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the plurality of LEDs that make up the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in red, reddish-purple, bluish-violet, blue, green, yellow, and orange colors that change depending on the elapsed time and the light emitting position. , the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors. The light emitting position of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can be specified in multiple sections, such as the upper and lower parts of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and the light emitting time, color, and light emission can be specified depending on each section. It is sufficient if part or all of the brightness can be set.

FIG. 12-12 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white as shown in FIG. 12-12(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in FIG. 12-12(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 12-12(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 1500 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-12(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. The light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to white according to the on period of the vibration effect is such that during the on period of 1500 ms, for example, the first brightness of the white light emitting brightness is high and the second brightness is low. By repeating this alternately, the white light emission brightness may change periodically.

FIGS. 12-13 show an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red as shown in FIG. 12-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 12-13(B), This can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. The operation unit performance based on the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is rainbow-colored as shown in FIG. 12-13(A), and a vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV03 shown in FIG. 12-13(B). , can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. As shown in FIG. 12-13(B), the vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the ON period continues for 3000 milliseconds. As shown in FIG. 12-13 (A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 are intermittently red in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect if the operation part effect pattern is AKC12. In the case of the operation section effect pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in rainbow colors. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 can emit red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the ON period of the vibration effect. The brightness may change periodically. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC12 is a light emission mode in which the luminance brightness is changed in a shorter cycle than the light emission effect included in the operation section effect according to the operation section effect pattern AKC11. becomes. In this manner, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by varying not only the color of the light emitted but also the period of the light emitted as a display mode of the light emitting effect. Note that during the on-period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternately repeating red light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light emitting effect, while the light emitting cycle is the same, the reliability of the jackpot may be suggested by changing the light emitting color. In this way, for example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effect are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making the light emitting period common.

FIG. 12-14 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance according to the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR1 which is a performance when a reach is established as shown in FIG. This includes a light emission effect in which the light emission color is pink as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in FIG. 12-14 (C). The performance AKR1, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. As shown in FIG. 12-14(C), the vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated multiple times at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit pink light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off.

FIG. 12-15 shows an example of controlling the operation section performance using the operation section performance pattern AKC22. The operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC22 can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, corresponding to the performance AKR2 which is a performance when a reach is established as shown in FIG. 12-15 (A), This includes a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color is orange as shown in (B), and a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV12 as shown in FIG. 12-15(C). The performance AKR2, which is a performance when a reach is established, may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image indicating a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a performance that displays a background image according to a reach formation. In addition, it may be any other performance that accompanies reach establishment. It is sufficient that the performance mode is different between the performance AKR1 and the performance AKR2, which are the performance when the reach is established. As shown in Figure 12-15 (C), the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV12 has an on period of the first vibration on time (for example, 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (for example, 100 milliseconds). After repeating the vibration twice alternately, a vibration mode including an on period of a second vibration on time (for example, 250 milliseconds) and an on period of a third vibration on time (for example, 500 milliseconds) is obtained. As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and may be turned off. Furthermore, when the on-periods of the vibration effects are different, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be made different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit light in orange. On the other hand, during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit light in orange. The lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently by repeating orange light emission and non-light emission every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time. do it.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, in correspondence with the performances AKS1 and AKS2 that are the performance at the time of reach development, and the light emission color is white. , vibration effects using vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance based on the vibration pattern AKV21 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of the operation section performance pattern AKC32, the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV22 has a vibration mode during the on period that matches the effect AKS2. As for the light emitting effects accompanying these vibration effects, in both of the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effects.

The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 can be executed corresponding to the success/failure agitation performance at timing AKT14, which is the time of the success/failure notification agitation, and includes a light emitting performance in which the emitted light color is gold, and a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV31. ,including. The vibration effect produced by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode in which the on period is 1500 milliseconds or more. In the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit gold light in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect.

As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission color of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted light color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored. In this case, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV03 different from the vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white in accordance with the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC11. I'm here. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13, which is when the reach is developed, include the operation part effects using the operation part effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. Contains things that In this way, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, have the same luminescent color, white, and the vibration effect. There are cases in which the vibration modes of the two are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, but the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that it is possible to use operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, include those that execute light emission effects in which the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow colors, such as operation unit effects using the operation unit effect patterns AKC12 and AKC13. There is. As in this case, the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, and the vibration effect The vibration mode may also be different. As in the case where the emitted light color becomes white, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different. Contains things that are common. In addition, as in the case where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow-colored, the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11 when the target change starts is different from the operation part effect executed at timing AKT13 when the reach develops, and the emission color The display may include different lighting modes. The operation section performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not need to include a light emission mode that is different from the operation section performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. All of these operation section performances have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14, which is the timing for inciting the success or failure notification, include those that execute a light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes golden along with the vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV31, such as the operation section effect using the operation section effect pattern AKC41. I'm here. This operation section performance has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the jackpot reliability is common at 100% between the operation part performance executed at timing AKT12 when reach is established and the operation part performance performed at timing AKT14 when the win/fail notification is triggered, and the vibration performance A case is provided in which the vibration mode of is different. Further, the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT14 when a win/fail notification is activated have different luminescent colors and different vibration modes of the vibration effect. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the jackpot reliability is the same, but the stick controller 31A is different due to the vibration mode of the vibration effect or the light emission mode of the light emission effect being different. It is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using operating members such as and push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The operation section effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target change starts are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, and the emitted light color changes to white, red, or rainbow colors due to the vibration effects based on the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. It includes something that executes a light-emitting effect. The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. In this way, the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation part effect executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, and the operation part effect executed at timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, and the vibration effect of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the aspects are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately varied. This can improve the game's interest.

The operation part effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12, which is when the reach is established, include the operation part effect using the operation part effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, and the light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange due to the vibration effect using the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Contains what to do. The operation section effects that can be executed at timing AKT13, which is when the reach develops, are the operation section effects using the operation section effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, and the light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. contains things. In this way, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the operation section effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation section effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different. There are cases where the values are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section effects is different, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different, or the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game. Note that the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white. Further, the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes pink or orange. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, even if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different, so that the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be changed. It is possible to improve gaming interest by appropriately diversifying the game.

The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. The reliability of the jackpot when the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100%, depending on the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation section performance pattern. When the operation section performance is executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, the reliability of the jackpot is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation part performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing at which the vibration performance is performed. Furthermore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration production includes the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity due to the drive of the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong vibration and weak vibration in the vibration intensity, etc. , it is only necessary that the vibration patterns for vibrating the operating members such as the operating lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be made different.

The plurality of specific performances that can be executed according to the progress of the game include movable body movement, image display, music playback, jackpot confirmation notification, and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 in the SP reach A reach performance. The reach effect of SP reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. Therefore, when the vibration effect is executed by the operation part effect, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the reach effect of SP reach A is executed, and when it is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher. Become. The movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the SP reach A reach effect are all executed as part of the reach effect, so they do not individually have jackpot reliability. Further, the jackpot confirmation notification is an effect that definitely informs that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the jackpot game state is controlled. Jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2 are similar to SP Reach A's reach effect in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state will be controlled. This is different from a performance that has a high reliability of hitting a jackpot. In this way, among a plurality of specific performances, for a specific performance that has jackpot reliability, the jackpot reliability will be higher if the vibration effect by the operation part effect is executed than if the specific effect is executed. It is sufficient if it is set as follows. Further, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is executed than when the vibration effect based on the operation unit effect is not executed.

FIGS. 12-16 show an example of performing an effect by causing the game effect lamp 9 to emit light. The game effect lamp 9 includes an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Here, a plurality of performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown depending on the execution mode of the performance using light emission.

Effect execution example AKF01 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit white light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is white. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit red light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light emission effect in which the color of the emitted light becomes red along with a vibration effect.

Effect execution example AKF02 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit red light that matches the background display when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit rainbow-colored light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to either of the operation section effect patterns AKC03 or AKC13 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes rainbow-colored along with a vibration effect.

In the production execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white from the left side to the right side, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are changed to the background display. At the same time, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operation section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to any of the operation section effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect.

Effect execution example AKF04 causes the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit blue light that matches the character display when the character display on the image display device 5 is displayed in blue. , the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. For example, the operation section effect according to any of the operation section effect patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes white along with the vibration effect.

For example, a predetermined effect by displaying a background display, character display, or any other effect image on the image display device 5 can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game, including variable display of decorative symbols. In the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of the effect control process process, control data read from the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the variable display, etc. Control is performed to execute a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the light emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. There is. When an operation section effect is executed while such a predetermined effect is being executed, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to be controlled by a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect. It is possible to emit light in the following light emission mode. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the operation part performance is controlled using the control data read from the operation part performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process. Control to execute is performed. This control data includes lamp control data that controls the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data that controls the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. It is included. In response to such a light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect in the operation section effect, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect of the operation section effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. It is. In this way, by making the light emitting modes different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and the other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, light emission can be achieved. It is possible to appropriately diversify the presentation and improve the interest in the game.

In addition to or in place of the screen display of the image display device 5, the predetermined effect may be executed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this case, while causing the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N to emit light in a color that matches the audio output such as BGM, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are operated. The light may be emitted in the color of the light emitting effect in the part effect. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output audio that is a message that gives the player an impression of red color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are made to emit red light in accordance with the audio output. On the other hand, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be caused to emit white light by a light emitting effect in the operating section effect. Even in this case, by making the light emission mode different between the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, , it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using light emission and improve game interest. The predetermined effect is to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and turn off the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, right frame lamp 9N, etc. You can also use it as When this predetermined effect is executed, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by a vibration effect in the operation section effect. By executing the operation part effect while executing such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased for the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. This can improve the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 12-17 shows an example of setting a performance period in which a specific interlocking performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movable body movement in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ01 includes a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in conjunction with the image display in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ02 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold along with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with music playback in the SP reach-A reach performance. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emitting color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A changes from blue to red to gold due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV43. .

The period AKZ04 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in response to the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific interlocking effects that can be executed during the period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A become rainbow colored in accordance with the special vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV44. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification includes stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative pattern, displaying a production image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach production, the speaker 8L, Any method that allows the player to recognize the jackpot by outputting a notification sound that confirms the jackpot with 8R, lighting up the jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these. It is sufficient if the notification is to be executed.

It should be noted that, following the operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC41 executed at timing AKT14, which is the time of triggering the win/fail notification, a specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ04 accompanying the jackpot confirmation notification may be performed. In this case, by executing a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification while the player's expectation is heightened by the operation section performance, the impression of the performance can be enhanced and the game's interest can be improved. When performing a specific interlocking effect following such an operation section effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect may be different between the operation section effect and the specific interlocking effect, or the light emitting effect or specific light emitting effect may be different. The light emission mode may also be made different. For example, the vibration intensity may be made different between the vibration effect and the special vibration effect. The light emission brightness may be made different between the light emission effect and the specific light emission effect. By varying the vibration mode and light emitting mode to give a sharp presentation, it is possible to easily distinguish between an operation section presentation and a specific interlocking presentation, thereby appropriately diversifying the presentation and improving the enjoyment of the game. Can be done.

The period AKZ05 is a period in which a specific interlocking performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. The specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is a specific light emission in which when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed, the light emission color of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B becomes white due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes performance. A specific interlocking effect that can be executed during the period AKZ05 is that when the jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed, the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow-colored due to the special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV44. Includes light-emitting effects.

FIGS. 12-18 to 12-20 show the case where the SP reach A reach effect is executed. FIG. 12-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when the movable body motion in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 12-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when image display in the SP reach A reach performance is executed. FIG. 12-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when music reproduction is executed in the SP reach A reach performance.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the ready-to-reach mode and the normal ready-to-reach presentation is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be any position in front of the lower end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Subsequently, when the reach performance of SP reach A is started due to reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, and the movable body movement is performed as in the performance execution example AKG01. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by upward linear movement or parallel movement from the initial position, and at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window provided inside the movable body 32, "SP An effect image showing a message such as "Reach A" is displayed. Thereafter, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the production execution example AKG02. At this time, at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window of the movable body 32, an effect image showing a message such as "This fluctuation is..." is displayed.

With the change in the position of the movable body 32 resulting in movable body movements such as performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the movement of the movable body in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in Figure 12-17. , contains. Furthermore, when the position change of the movable body 32 continues and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front of the upper end on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the production execution example AKG03, the specific linked production in the period AKZ01 ends. do. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches from the front of the lower end to the front of the upper end with respect to the initial position of the display screen is 2500 milliseconds, and the stick controller 31A is continuously operated during this period AKZ01. A special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the lever or push button 31B is vibrated. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, the special vibration performance may be performed in a vibration manner in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched every 250 milliseconds between an on period in which the stick controller vibrates and an off period in which it does not vibrate. Further, the specific light emission effect may be executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A continuously emits blue light over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light emission effect is executed in a light emission mode in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between blue light emission (on) and non-light emission (lights off) every 250 milliseconds. Good too.

When the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP reach A such as production execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 is executed, the position of the movable body 32 of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N is changed, for example. The light may be emitted in a light emitting pattern in which the emitted light color and emitted light brightness gradually change from the bottom to the top. For example, in the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the emitted light color changes to blue, and the emitted light brightness changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time. All you have to do is emit light.

After the movable body movement is completed as in the performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as an image display in the SP reach A reach performance as in the performance execution example AKG11. At this time, for example, text indicating the message "Super Hot" is displayed in gold. Further, as in the production execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added and displayed around the character display.

Along with the display of performance images such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific linked performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking effects that are executed together with the image display in the reach effect of SP Reach A are a special vibration effect with a vibration pattern AKV42, a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color becomes gold, in the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 12-17, Contains. When the character display indicating the message ends and the display of a performance image in a reach performance different from the text display starts, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific linked performance in period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the character display indicating the message "Very Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and during this period AKZ02, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously vibrated. A special vibration effect may be performed in a different manner. In addition, during the period AKZ02, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is set to a light emitting mode that alternately repeats the first brightness, which has a high golden light emitting brightness, and the second brightness, which has a low light emitting brightness, every 10 milliseconds. A specific light emission effect may be executed.

When the image display in the reach effect of SP reach A like effect execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 is executed, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. It is sufficient that the emitted light color is gold in accordance with the image display and the emitted light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, with the display of the effect images such as the effect execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N will emit light in gold color, as in the effect execution example AKG13. When the display of the effect image starts, it is sufficient to emit light in a color different from gold.

After the display of the performance image as in the performance execution example AKG13 is started, the sound of the music phrase PH01 is outputted by the speakers 8L and 8R as in the performance execution example AKG21 as music reproduction in the reach performance of SP reach A. Subsequently, as in production execution example AKG22, the speakers 8L and 8R output the audio of the music phrase PH02. Thereafter, as in production execution example AKG23, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to perform the entire music playback in the SP reach A reach performance by sequentially outputting the sounds of the plurality of music phrases PH01 to PH03 in accordance with the progress of the performance.

In conjunction with the output of the sound that plays music such as the performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific interlocking performance is executed to cause the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to vibrate and emit light. The specific interlocking performance that is executed with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A is a special vibration performance with vibration pattern AKV43, a change in the luminous color from blue to red, and It includes a specific light emitting effect that changes from red to gold. In the production execution example AKG21, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes blue is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH01. In the production execution example AKG22, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes red is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH02. In the production execution example AKG23, a specific light emission production in which the light emission color becomes gold is executed in response to the audio output of the music phrase PH03. In this way, it is only necessary to execute a specific light emitting effect in which the emitted light color changes to a plurality of colors as the voices of a plurality of musical phrases PH01 to PH03 are sequentially output as the effect progresses.

FIG. 12-21 shows a music reproduction execution example AKH01 in which the musical scale changes in order as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21(A), during the period AKZ03 during which the specific interlocking effect can be executed as the music is played, each of C, R, E, F, G, A, C, and C is displayed. Sounds corresponding to the musical scale are output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the C scale that is output last may be one octave higher than the C scale that is output first.

Such specific interlocking effects that accompany music playback include a specific light emission effect in which the emitted light color changes as shown in Figure 12-21 (B), and a special light emission effect that uses a vibration pattern as shown in Figure 12-21 (C). It includes a vibration performance, which is a vibration performance, and can be executed in a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration effect shown in FIG. 12-21(C) has a vibration mode in which on-periods and off-periods are alternately repeated a plurality of times in accordance with the output period of the audio corresponding to each scale. As shown in FIG. 12-21(B), the specific light emission effect accompanying this special vibration effect is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the ON period of the special vibration effect. The emitted light color changes sequentially from blue to red to gold. During the stop period of the audio output and the off period of the special vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and need only be turned off. Note that during the audio output period corresponding to each scale, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect may be made different for each scale. For example, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is made to emit blue light continuously over a period of time during which the first C scale is output. Next, during a certain period of the ``R'' scale, the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is caused to emit light in a light emission mode that alternately repeats a first brightness with a high red light emission brightness and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness. Thereafter, during a period of the Mi scale, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are caused to emit light in a light emitting mode that switches between golden light emitting (lighting up) and non-emitting light (lighting out). In this way, by providing a light emitting mode in which the amount of light emitted differs depending on the color of light corresponding to each musical scale, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performance and improve the interest in the game.

The reach performance of SP reach A is executable controlled by using control data read from the variable display performance control pattern in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command. The variable display effect control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8(A) uses lamp control data and vibration control data to perform specific effects such as movable body movement, image display, and music playback in the reach effect of SP Reach A. It is set to be able to execute specific linked effects. In the specific interlocking performance, it is possible to execute a special vibration performance using any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance using any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance using the vibration pattern in the operation section performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation part performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance, so that the stick controller 31A and It is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the push button 31B, thereby improving the interest in the game.

When performing the operation section effect, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are made to emit light using the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2, along with the vibration effect that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A light emitting effect is executed. When performing a specific interlocking effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 are used to vibrate the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, along with a special vibration effect that vibrates the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. A specific light emitting effect that causes light to emit light is executed. By executing an effect that includes vibration and light emission of the operating members such as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, the player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, can enjoy the image display. By recognizing the vibrations and light emission of different operating members, the unexpectedness of the performance can be increased.

In the period AKZ01 shown in FIGS. 12-17, with the movement of the movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP reach A, a specific interlocking effect including a special vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to perform the special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby improving the game's interest.

In the period AKZ04 shown in FIGS. 12-17, in response to the jackpot confirmation notification, a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV44 becomes executable. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to notification that the jackpot game state is being controlled, it is possible to appropriately diversify effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B, thereby improving the game's interest. be able to.

The specific interlocking performance includes a specific light emission performance in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in conjunction with a special vibration performance based on any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emitting performance accompanying the vibration performance in the operation section performance and the specific light emission performance accompanying the special vibration performance in the specific interlocking performance differ in light emitting modes such as emitted light color. In this way, by changing the light emission mode depending on the operation part performance and the specific interlocking performance, the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Can be done.

As shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emitted color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow color. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission color of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow-colored, which is different from white, and when the emitted color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow-colored. A vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the timing to be executed is different between the vibration effects of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the vibration effects of the operation part effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. In addition to being different, the vibration modes are also different. In addition, the emitted light color is white and red for the vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the preliminary variation, and the vibration effect of the operation unit effect, which can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation. By being one of the rainbow colors, the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common. In this way, by providing a case in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different while the light emitting mode of the light emission effect is common when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, operations such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be performed. The interest in the game can be improved by appropriately diversifying the effects using the members.

The vibration effect of the operation unit effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary variation, is executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning judgment result, which is the pre-read judgment result. Executed in the variable display before the variable display to be executed. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit performances are executed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the performances using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and improve the interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is such that the emitted light color is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color becomes red or rainbow color, which is different from white, and when the emitted color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and the emitted color becomes red or rainbow color. If so, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on whether the emitted light color is white or the emitted color is red or rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation part effect is the same, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the operation member such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B can be used. It is possible to appropriately diversify performances and improve game interest. It should be noted that a vibration effect based on a common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed in both the case where the emitted light color is red and the case where the emitted light color is rainbow colored. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same whether the emitted light color is red or the emitted color is rainbow colored. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation part effect is the same, a case may be provided in which the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous notice performance is an operation part performance pattern in which the light emitting color differs depending on whether the remaining number of times is other than "0" or when the remaining number of times is "0". There are some that include. For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5(A) is the operation section performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number of times is "1" and the operation section performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number of times is "0". , contains. The operation section performance according to the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color is white. The operation section performance based on the operation section performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the emitted light color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission effect accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation part effect that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission effect accompanied by the vibration effect of the operation element effect, which can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the time when the target change starts. The light emission mode differs between the two. In this way, by providing cases where the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation part effect is different, the effect using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified. It is possible to improve the game's interest.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance, the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is higher than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. is set to prevent it from becoming inferior. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 12-5(A), if the operation part performance pattern is AKC02 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This is set to prevent the operation section performance pattern AKC11 from occurring. If the operation part performance pattern is AKC03 when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation part performance pattern AKC11 or the operation part performance pattern AKC12 will be used as the operation part performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". It is set to prevent. This prevents the operation section effect with low jackpot reliability from being executed later, such as at the start of the target variation, even though the operation section effect with high jackpot reliability is executed first at the start of the preliminary variation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without lowering the player's expectations.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuation, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is Including cases where the emitted light is white, and cases where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color different from white, when the emitted light color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period and off period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV01. and non-emission are repeated, and when the emitted light color becomes red, it emits light continuously in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the light emission color of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect is white. This includes cases where the emitted light color is different from white, such as red or rainbow color, and when the emitted color is white, the emitted light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and the emitted light color becomes red. In this case, the light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect based on the vibration pattern AKV03. Since the vibration effects using the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 have different on-period settings, the light emission modes such as the light emission period in the light emission effects will differ. Even in this case, it is only necessary to provide a case where the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different when the timing of executing the operation section effect is different.

(Modified examples of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation part performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1, etc.

Regarding the operation part effects, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the settings of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be determined in different proportions depending on the value. Regarding the specific interlocking effect, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration effect, the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on the setting values of the pachinko gaming machine 1, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value of . In addition, regarding the operation part performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration display, the light emission mode of the light emission display, and the jackpot reliability may be varied depending on any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages. Regarding the specific interlocking performance, the execution timing, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree regarding the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, Different ratios may be determined depending on such advantages.

If the timing of executing the operation part effect is different or the same, if the vibration mode of the vibration effect is different or the same, or if the light emission mode of the light emission effect is different or the same, the jackpot reliability will be Combinations in each case, such as different cases and common cases, can be arbitrarily set according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the timing of execution is different or the same for the operation part effect and the specific linked effect, when the vibration mode of the vibration effect or special vibration effect is different or the same, the light emission mode of the light emission effect or specific light emission effect. The combinations in each case, such as when the numbers are different and when they are the same, can be arbitrarily set depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by making the light emission modes of the light emission effects common. When the light emission modes of the light emission effects are different, it is sufficient if the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by making the vibration modes of the vibration effects common. When some vibration modes in the vibration effects are different, it is only necessary to reduce the control burden of the vibration effects by making other vibration modes in the vibration effects common. For example, when the vibration intensities of the vibration performances are different, it is sufficient that the control burden of the vibration performances can be reduced by making the vibration periods of the vibration performances common. When some light emitting modes in a light emitting effect are different, it is sufficient if the burden of controlling the light emitting effect can be reduced by making other light emitting modes in the light emitting effect common. For example, when the light emitting colors in the light emitting effects are different, the burden of controlling the light emitting effects can be reduced by making the light emitting cycle common in the light emitting effects. It is sufficient if the control burden can be reduced by similarly standardizing the vibration mode of the special vibration effect and the light emission mode of the specific light emission effect.

In addition to or instead of executing the variable display, when the game is controlled to any game state such as a small win game state or a jackpot game state, the operation section performance or specific interlocking performance is executed. It may be possible. For example, when the game is controlled to be a small winning game state, a predetermined percentage is determined depending on whether or not the V winning attacker is opened, the opening time, the number of openings, or the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state that is controlled after the occurrence of the V winning attacker. It may also be possible to perform the operation section performance with. When controlled in a jackpot gaming state, the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the jackpot gaming state ends, the termination conditions, and the rank-up that will result in an increased number of rounds than the number of rounds announced earlier in the jackpot gaming state. It may also be possible to perform the operation section effect at a predetermined rate depending on the presence or absence, amount of increase, etc. It may be possible to execute a specific interlocking performance in conjunction with a specific performance, such as movable object movement, image display, and music playback in a small winning game state or a jackpot gaming state.

The specific performance that can be executed as a specific interlocking performance may be any performance that can be executed depending on the execution of the variable display, or may be any performance that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, if a variable display result at a predetermined rate becomes a "jackpot" and a suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, a specific effect may occur during some or all of the effect periods. It may also be possible to perform linked effects.

When controlled to an arbitrary performance state, an operation section performance or a specific interlocking performance may be made executable. For example, when the production state is controlled to be a special production mode, the operation section production or specific linked production is performed at a higher rate than when the production state is controlled to a production mode different from the special production mode. It may be possible.

The operating member capable of performing effects using vibrations or light emission may be any motion detecting member configured to be able to detect the player's motion. For example, it may be a sensor that detects an operation on a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects a contact operation or a pressing operation on a touch panel. Furthermore, a sensor capable of detecting a predetermined action by a player may be used, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. The player's actions may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands or the like using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined action by a player may be used. Along with such a motion detection member, a contact member that can be touched by a player's hand or the like may be provided, and the contact member may vibrate or emit light together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member. .

The vibration effects included in the operation section effects can correspond to the vibration effects in the feature part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effects in the feature part 49AK, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation section effects, the vibration effects included in the operation section effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the pre-variation start times, can correspond to the first vibration effects in the characteristic section 50AK. Among the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts can correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic unit 50AK. The light emitting effects included in the operation part effects include a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect in the feature part 48AK, a light emitting effect accompanying a predetermined vibration effect in the feature part 49AK, and a light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect in the feature part 50AK. Compatible with light emitting effects. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effect that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of advance fluctuations, are the light emitting effects associated with the first vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. Can be adapted to performances. Among the light emitting effects included in the operation section effects, the light emitting effects associated with the vibration effects included in the operation effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of target variation, are the light emitting effects associated with the second vibration effect in the feature section 50AK. I can handle it. The special vibration performance included in the specific linked performance can correspond to the special vibration performance in the feature section 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always performed via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 operates. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the time-saving state (high base state) can be achieved without operating the special variable winning ball device 7. ).

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the winning symbol or may be a part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Moreover, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, if the time saving symbol is won, there will be no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers); When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display number of the time-saving state (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

Also, regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a random number of losing symbols is used in the drawing of a time-saving symbol, the winning value will be a specific random number of losing symbols, and if a random number of jackpot symbols is used in the lottery of time-saving symbols, a specific number will be used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random values are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the setting, so this is only possible if the setting values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, even if the time-saving number is reset or the lottery is not selected, it is only necessary to decide for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, there can be a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time-saving granting conditions can be made different for each time-saving symbol.

Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

Furthermore, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may differ depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required to be predetermined for the gaming state.

In addition, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated.

Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, a vibration performance execution means that can perform a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates, and an operation means that is accompanied by the vibration performance. and a light emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light emitting effect that emits light. The rate at which the vibration effect is controlled to an advantageous state varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed. The aspects are different. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration presentation is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section presentation pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed means that, for example, it is possible to win a jackpot depending on the emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be something like reliability. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, as long as it is the emission color and vibration pattern AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation section effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the timing at which vibration effects can be performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode, The vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when they are executed. The aspects may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode, and the vibration mode may also be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the vibration effect executed at the timing when the advanced effect is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with a predetermined effect. There may be. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means It may also be possible to perform the line-of-sight guidance performance before the vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a vibration production that can perform a predetermined vibration production and a special vibration production as a vibration production in which the operation means vibrates. The predetermined vibration effect includes an execution means, a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect in which the operating means emits light in accordance with a predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect according to the progress of the game. The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when a predetermined vibration effect is executed than when it is not executed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the situation, and the vibration performance execution means can execute a special vibration performance in conjunction with the execution of a specific performance, and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance. . Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using a vibration pattern included in the operation section effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 based on vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation part performance control pattern and the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. Bye. The light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 according to the light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific performance may be, for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, or the like. The specific performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the predetermined vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed depends on, for example, the light emitting color included in the operation part effect pattern and the purpose of the operation part effect pattern. It may be anything such as jackpot reliability. The fact that the special vibration performance can be executed may be, for example, the execution of the vibration performance during the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which variable display is started may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing when an advanced performance is executed after the variable display becomes a ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different between the case where the light emission effect is executed in the light emission mode and the case where the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emitting mode may be a case where the emitted light color is red or rainbow color, for example. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Yes, the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , the vibration mode may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready mode may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the predetermined vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. . Here, the different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner of a light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting effect in accordance with the predetermined effect. It may be possible. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the predetermined vibration effect can be executed in a common vibration mode regardless of whether it is at the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guide effect execution means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing or the second timing. It may also be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance before the predetermined vibration performance is performed at the second timing without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the specific effect is executed. Here, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation level of 50% or more, which is higher than when the SP reach A reach effect is executed.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the predetermined vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

The specific performance execution means may be able to execute a performance that causes the movable member to operate as the specific performance, and the vibration performance execution unit may be capable of executing a special vibration performance during the operation period of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation period of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration performance in response to notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot confirmation notification. The special vibration effect accompanying this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the vibration effects and improve the interest in the game.

The light emitting effect execution means is capable of executing a specific light emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the special vibration effect, and the light emission mode is different between the light emitting effect accompanying the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emitting effect accompanying the special vibration effect. Good too. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 based on the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission mode may be different, for example, if the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from the case where the light emission color is blue, gold, or changes from blue to gold through red.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects and improve the game's interest.

When the special vibration performance is executed, a restriction means for restricting the execution of the predetermined vibration performance may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 when determining the operation section performance in step AKS202.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately perform the vibration effect and improve the interest in the game.

(Problem solving means and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and has an operation means that can be operated by the player, and is capable of performing a first vibration performance and a second vibration performance as a vibration performance in which the operation means vibrates. The apparatus includes a vibration performance execution means and a light emission performance execution means capable of executing a light emission performance that causes the operating means to emit light in conjunction with the vibration performance, and when the vibration performance is performed, the vibration performance is better than when the vibration performance is not performed. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is high, and the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is different depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance, and the timing at which the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance are executed is different. are different, and the vibration modes are different, and the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, driving the vibration motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, driving the drive motor 131 using vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emitting effect may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting light according to the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation section effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when the vibration performance is executed is higher may be determined by, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the operation section performance pattern. The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state depending on the light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the vibration effect may be different as long as it is, for example, the jackpot reliability depending on the light emitting color included in the operation section effect pattern. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be performed at different timings, for example, as long as the preliminary fluctuation start timings AKT01 to AKT03 are different from the target fluctuation start timing AKT11. The vibration mode may be different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance, for example, as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission effect is common between the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect is, for example, when the light emission color included in the operation part effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow color. etc. is fine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, the timing at which the variable display is started may be, for example, the timing AKT11 at which the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the variable display becomes a ready-to-reach mode. Here, the timing at which the variable display becomes the ready mode may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing when the development performance is executed after the variable display becomes the ready-to-win mode. Here, the timing at which the development effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the second vibration performance at a timing at which a notification performance for notifying whether or not the control is controlled to be in an advantageous state is executed. Here, the timing at which the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the timing at which vibration effects can be performed.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display starts includes a first light emitting mode and a second light emitting mode different from the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting mode is the first light emitting mode. The vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect is changed by the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the variable display starts, and the second vibration effect that is executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. They are common, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common as long as the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode and the second vibration performance that is executed at the timing when the notification performance is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state when executed. , and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the common ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state may be the case, for example, if the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode, and even if the vibration mode is different. good. Here, the light emission mode may be different as long as, for example, the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow-colored, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified depending on the timing, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibration mode is different between the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes the reach mode and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes the reach mode. Good too. Here, the vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by diversifying the vibration mode of the vibration effect depending on the timing.

A first light emitting means for causing the operating means to emit light, a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means, and a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect according to the progress of the game, and the game is performed while the predetermined effect is being executed. When the second vibration effect is executed, the first light emitting means can emit light in the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect, and the second light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the light emission effect according to the predetermined effect. It may also be possible to emit light. Here, the first light emitting means may be, for example, the lever lamp 9B1 or the button lamp 9B2. The second light emitting means may be, for example, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, or the right frame lamp 9N. The predetermined effect may be, for example, displaying a background image or a character image. The predetermined effect execution means may be, for example, the image display device 5. The light emission mode corresponding to the vibration effect may be, for example, a light emission color included in the operation section effect pattern. The light emission mode according to the predetermined effect may be, for example, a light emission mode according to the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern.
In such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The vibrating effect execution means is provided with a line-of-sight guide effect execution means capable of executing a line-of-sight guide effect for guiding the player's line of sight to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is configured to perform a line-of-sight guide effect at a first timing and at a second timing subsequent to the first timing. , the second vibration performance can be executed in a common vibration manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing, and the line-of-sight guidance performance execution means It may be possible to perform the eye-gaze guidance performance without performing the eye-gaze guidance performance at one timing and before the second vibration performance is performed at the second timing. Here, the line-of-sight guiding effect execution means may be, for example, the game effect lamps 9L, 9R. The first timing may be, for example, timing T1 or T2. The second timing may be, for example, timing T3 or T4. The common vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration time is 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds. If the line-of-sight guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be the timings T1 and T2 in step 10SHS3, for example. If the eye-gaze guiding effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be the case, for example, at timings T3 and T4 in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be suitably recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration performance execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration performance in the variable display before the variable display in which the second vibration performance is executed, based on the pre-read determination result. Here, the variable display before the variable display corresponding to the pending storage may be, for example, a variable display that is a prior change.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting effect accompanying the first vibration effect includes a light emitting mode during the first vibration and a light emitting mode during the second vibration which is different from the light emitting mode during the first vibration, and the light emitting effect is the light emitting mode during the first vibration. The vibration mode of the first vibration effect may be different between when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the light emission mode during the first vibration may be, for example, a case where the light emission color is white. The light emitting mode during the second vibration may be, for example, a case where the emitted light color is red or a rainbow color. The vibration mode may be different as long as the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration mode of the vibration effect and the light emission mode of the light emission effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect accompanying the first vibration effect and the light emission effect accompanying the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode is different because, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" depending on the continuous effect pattern, the light emission color of the operation part effect pattern is different from when the remaining number of times is "0". Good to have.
In such a configuration, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect can be diversified to improve the game's interest.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each configuration related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual feature parts that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other feature parts, as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and also has a normal state and a special state that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state. A game machine (for example, Pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled in a time-saving state (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state)), and has an operation means (for example, a stick controller 31A) that can be operated by a player. , push button 31B, etc.), and the vibration effects in which the operating means vibrate include predetermined vibration effects (for example, driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the operation part effect pattern) and special vibration effects (for example, variable display effect control). Vibration effect execution means (for example, using the vibration control data of the operation part effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process in step S172), and a light emission performance that causes the operating means to emit light in accordance with the predetermined vibration performance (for example, a lever lamp 9B1 and Light emission effect execution means (e.g., light emission of the button lamp 9B2) (for example, for effect control that executes the variable display effect processing in step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation part effect control pattern determined in step AKS203) (CPU 120, etc.), and a specific performance execution means (for example, a variable display determined in step AKS203) that can execute a specific performance (for example, SP reach A reach performance, jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game. (a CPU 120 for effect control, etc.) that executes the effect processing during the variable display in step S172 based on the effect control pattern, and when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. However, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is high (for example, jackpot reliability according to the operation part performance pattern, etc.), and the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the predetermined vibration performance and the predetermined vibration performance are executed. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the timing (for example, the luminous color included in the operation section performance pattern and the jackpot reliability depending on the application of the operation section performance pattern, etc.), and the vibration performance execution means, The special vibration performance can be performed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance (for example, the vibration performance during the period AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration mode is different between the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance (for example, the vibration pattern Vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, etc. that are different from AKV41 to AKV44),
A predetermined vibration effect can be performed at the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode (here, the timing when the variable display becomes the ready-to-reach mode may be, for example, timing AKT12).
moreover,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, an updating means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13);
Adjustment means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21) that adjusts the speed of awarding gaming value to be provided in a unit period to decrease when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. (a part in which the CPU 103 lengthens the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the ball release state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball release state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table according to the identified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. (a part in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed), and a gaming machine.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Furthermore, according to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the adjustment to reduce the speed of awarding the gaming value is executed, so when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, the It is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high due to the provision of excessive gaming value, and it is also possible to perform performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, thereby increasing the interest in the game. You can improve.
In other words, using the operating means, it is possible to improve the game's interest by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect, and it is also possible to make adjustments to reduce the speed at which game value is awarded. Since this is executed, it is possible to prevent excessive gaming value from being given in a short period of time and the gambling element is excessively increased, and the production control is performed in accordance with whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve gaming enjoyment.

In other words, attention will be paid to the light emitting mode that has a high rate of controlling a predetermined vibration effect to an advantageous state, whether or not it is executed at the execution timing of the vibration effect, and whether or not a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game, and also make adjustments to reduce the speed at which game values are awarded (for example, when selecting a variable pattern, the variable display time is made longer than when the speed at which game values are awarded is not slowed down). Since the performance corresponding to the adjustment is performed when the adjustment (adjustment) is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game while preventing excessive gaming value from being provided in a short period of time. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, has an appropriate gambling quality and easily attracts players' interest.

Further, as the number of consecutive hits increases, the vibration operation mode of the operating means may increase. By doing so, the vibration mode of the operating means is diversified by playing consecutive games, and the interest is improved.

Further, the operating means may vibrate when more than a predetermined number of wins (11 or more wins in 10 counts) occur in the variable winning means during an advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to clearly inform the player that an over-win has occurred, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, it is possible to control the gaming machine to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and to control the gaming machine to a normal state and the more advantageous state than the normal state. A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state)) that is easily controlled by
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, an updating means that can be updated to "1" or "2" (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13);
Adjustment means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21) that adjusts the speed of awarding gaming value to be provided in a unit period to decrease when the predetermined numerical data is the second value. (a part in which the CPU 103 lengthens the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the ball release state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball release state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means is capable of executing effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table corresponding to the specified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. (a part in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed), and a gaming machine. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[form]
Type 1 gaming machine is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and it also has a normal state and a special state that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state (high-accuracy, high-base state, etc.). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in a low-accuracy, high-base state)),
The number of times the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (for example, a period of consecutive winning states) in which the normal state has never been controlled from the time when the normal state was controlled to the advantageous state or the special state When a specific number of hits has been reached (for example, when the number of consecutive games is greater than or equal to the first determination number of times "5"), the predetermined numerical data is changed from the first value (for example, "0") to the second value ( For example, the predetermined numerical data is the second value. In some cases, the CPU 103 adjusts the speed at which the gaming value is awarded during the unit period to decrease (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-13 and 14-21, the CPU 103 A part for lengthening the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game by setting the status flag value to "1" or "2",
The updating means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when an end condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that sets the ball release state flag to "0" based on the same set variable display remaining number after judgment becoming 0 when it is set to "1"),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to reduce the speed of awarding gaming value, so when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, excessive It is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high due to the addition of gaming value.

The gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment,
A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a jackpot),
The adjusting means is arranged such that a variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value is a variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. Adjust so that it is longer than the variable display period (for example, as shown in Figure 14-8, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2" (the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state) When the ball output status flag is in a high ball output state), the special figure variable display time in each variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output status flag is "0" (when the ball output status is low). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by lengthening the variable display period, the time interval of the advantageous state that occurs when the predetermined numerical data is the second value can be lengthened, so that when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, The speed at which game values are awarded can be reduced without reducing the game value that is awarded in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment or the second embodiment,
The advantageous state includes a grantable period during which gaming value can be granted (for example, the period of each round game in which the grand prize opening is open as shown in Figure 14-20) and a granting period during which gaming value cannot be granted. Including the disabled period (for example, as shown in Figure 14-20, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period in which the grand prize opening is closed),
The adjustment means is configured to adjust the period during which the advantageous state cannot be granted, which is controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, to the advantageous state, which is controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in Figure 14-21, if the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "1" or "2", the value of the ball dispensing state flag is (The part where the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending period during jackpot games are set longer than when it is "0"),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by lengthening the non-granting period in which no gaming value is awarded, it is possible to reduce the speed at which gaming value is awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to third embodiments,
Whether the advantageous state is a first advantageous state (for example, variable probability jackpot B) or a second advantageous state in which the amount of gaming value awarded is greater than the first advantageous state (for example, variable probability jackpot A). (For example, a part in which the CPU 103 executes the process (step 162 SGS 154) for determining the jackpot type in the special symbol normal process shown in FIGS. 14-16) capable of determining the advantageous state type determining means,
The adjustment means is configured to adjust the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means when the predetermined numerical data is the second value to be such that the predetermined numerical data is the first value. In some cases, the first advantageous state is adjusted to be higher than the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determining means (for example, as shown in Modification 162SG-1, the ball output state is a high ball output state). In this case, the part that lowers the determination rate of variable probability jackpot A and increases the determination rate of variable probability jackpot B as a jackpot type than when the ball output state is low ball output state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it becomes easier to determine the first advantageous state in which the size of the game value awarded is small. Since it is possible to reduce the magnitude of the gaming value awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is possible to reduce the speed at which the gaming value is awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments,
The adjusting means is configured to adjust the rate at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determining means when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, when the predetermined numerical data is the first value. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-2, the rate at which the end of the advantageous period is determined by the advantageous period end determining means is higher than the rate at which the end of the advantageous period is determined is adjusted to (a part that increases the rate of determining the type as non-probable variable jackpot, a part that increases the rate of winning a falling lottery in a high ball state than in a low ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it becomes easier to determine the end of the advantageous period and control to the normal state, so that successive advantageous conditions occur through the special condition. Since the number of times can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the speed at which game values are awarded when the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth embodiments, and includes:
The termination condition is that the number of occurrences of the advantageous state that has occurred during the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means has reached the number of termination determination times. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 162SG-3, the first high ball output state is The part that controls the ball state and the second high ball state to a low ball state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment can be ended when an advantageous state of the number of times of termination determination occurs in an advantageous period.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth embodiments,
A gaming machine that executes a variable display and can be controlled to the advantageous state when the variable display result becomes a specific result (for example, a jackpot),
The termination condition is that the number of variable displays executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means has reached the number of termination determinations (for example, after the determination The value set as the remaining number of variable displays, ``100,'' becomes ``0'' after executing the variable display 100 times.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the adjustment can be completed when the variable display of the number of completion determinations is performed after the predetermined numerical data has been updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of embodiment 8 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 7,
The termination condition is that the magnitude of the gaming value used in the game after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the updating means has reached the magnitude for termination determination. (For example, as shown in Modification Example 162SG-4, after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1", the game balls that have entered each winning slot or the out slot during the consecutive winning state) (a part that sets the value of the ball release state flag to "0" based on the total number of entered game balls reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value, the adjustment is finished when the magnitude of the gaming value used in the game reaches the magnitude of the end determination. can do.

The gaming machine of embodiment 9 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 8,
a storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining the value of the predetermined numerical data even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Initialization means that initializes the storage contents of the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 When executing the game control main process shown in FIG.
Equipped with
When the storage contents of the storage means are initialized by the initialization means, the first value is set to the predetermined numerical data (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, the CPU 103 (The part where "0" corresponding to the low ball output state is set as the value of the ball output state flag in the process),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent adjustment from being performed at the start of power supply.

The gaming machine of embodiment 10 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 9,
comprising a storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining the value of the predetermined numerical data even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the predetermined numerical data is restored based on the value of the predetermined numerical data held in the storage means (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 - When executing the game control main process shown in 11, if the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), execute the recovery process (step S4) including the process of updating the ball output state flag using backup data. , if the ball was in a high ball output state when the power outage occurred, it will be restored to the high ball output state, and if it was in the low ball roll state at the time of the power outage, it will be restored to the low ball output state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the predetermined numerical data at the time of occurrence of power outage is the second value, adjustment can be continued when power outage is restored.

The gaming machine of embodiment 11 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 10,
Notification means that can notify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. After setting the value to "1", the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 starts lighting in the process of step 162SG08).
It is characterized by
It can be recognized that the adjustment has been made because the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine according to the twelfth embodiment of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine according to the embodiment 11,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
A light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting parts whose light emission is controlled by the game control means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the high ball status notification LED 162SG071). and,
The notification is performed by causing the light emitting unit to emit light (for example, the part that notifies the high ball state by lighting the high ball state notification LED 162SG071),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, notification can be performed by the game control means through light emission control common to other light emitting parts.

The gaming machine of embodiment 13 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 12,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game;
Production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) that can control production based on control information (for example, production control commands shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 Step 162 (portion where the command control process shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the transmission setting of the ball release state designation command is executed in the process of SGS17),
The effect control means can execute effect control based on control information that can specify that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28). In the advance notice performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command, and uses a preview performance type determination table according to the identified ball release state to display the ball display in a variable manner. (a part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of performance of the preview performance to be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute performance control corresponding to whether or not the predetermined numerical data is the second value, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of embodiment 14 of characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine according to any one of embodiments 1 to 13,
A performance that can execute a specific performance that can suggest that there is a high possibility of being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a reach performance) and a preview performance that foretells the execution of the specific performance (for example, a pre-read preview performance) Equipped with execution means (for example, CPU 120 for performance control),
The effect executing means limits execution of the preview effect during a predetermined period before the predetermined numerical data is updated from the second value to the first value by the updating means (for example, in FIG. As shown in 23, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the limit number of pre-reading in the process of step 162SGS242b of the pre-read preview setting process, and determines whether the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the pre-read limit number. If it is less than the pre-reading limit number of times (step 162SGS242b; Y), the pre-reading preview performance is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the preview performance from becoming inappropriate due to adjustment not being executed due to the predetermined numerical data being updated from the second value to the first value.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 109SG)
Next, the feature section 109SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 109SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be described.

Conventional gaming machines, such as those described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-99572 (Patent Document 1), are capable of notifying performance results by the movement of a movable body (execution of a specific performance), and are capable of outputting performance sounds. Some devices are equipped with speakers (sound output means).

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is capable of executing a suggestive effect that suggests that a specific effect will be executed by repeatedly moving a movable body in a period before executing the specific effect, and A conceivable method is to make the player pay attention to whether or not a specific performance will be executed by executing the performance. Furthermore, such a gaming machine can finish the repetitive motion of the movable body as a suggestive effect a predetermined period before the specific effect, and change the types of effect sounds output from the speaker before and after the predetermined period ( It may be possible to improve the game's interest by changing the type of sound output from the speakers, but it is possible that the types of sound output from the speakers may change before and after the predetermined period. There is a problem in that recognition becomes difficult due to the movement of the movable body.

The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which it is easy to recognize that the type of effect sound changes before and after a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 109SG. As shown in FIG. 13-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 109S, a movable unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. .

The movable unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410, as shown in FIG. 13-3(A). A first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction, a second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction, and a second movable body 109SG402L is located at the right side of the base 109SG410 in the left and right width direction. A third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

The movable body unit 109SG400 also includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L. It has a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. For this reason, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in this feature section 109SG can operate independently from the first movable body 109SG401. Furthermore, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of these first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved to the retracted position, which is the lower position of the image display device 5, by the drive of the first movable body motor 109SG421. (see FIG. 13-3(A)), a suggested position above the retreat position (see FIG. 13-3(B)), an effect that is above the suggested position and is also the front position of the image display device 5. It can be moved to any position (see Figure 13-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the retracted position (FIG. 13 13-3(A)) to a position close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 (see FIG. 13-3(C)) which has moved to the production position.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-3(A) to 13-3(C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all in the retracted position. The first state of the movable body unit 109SG400 is that the first movable body 109SG401 is in the suggested position, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are in the retracted position. The state is the second state of the movable unit 109SG400, where the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the production position, and the first movable body 109SG401 where the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the production position. The state in which the movable body unit 109SG400 is located at the left and right adjacent positions is defined as the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400.

FIG. 13-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 109SG. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 13-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be set arbitrarily according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 13-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-4(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates the predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, the jackpot type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and a small hit as the winning determination result. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 13-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 13-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 13-5, in this feature section 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 109SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 13-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 109SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 shows variable display results in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 109SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 109SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 109SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 109SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 13-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 109SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 109SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 13-7(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 109SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 109SG using FIG. 13-7(B), in this feature section 109SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that shifts, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that shifts to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). . In addition, in the jackpot game state of "probable variable jackpot C" and "non-probable variable jackpot", rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

Although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in the feature section 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot are continuously performed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state. , resulting in a so-called consecutive housing situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 109SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 13-7 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 13-8 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that although this feature section 109SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. It may be provided.

In addition, the variation pattern in this feature section 109SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 13-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 109SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 13-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 13-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-5 (Super Reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) and PB1. -2 (Super Reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (Super Reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (Super Reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (Super Reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern) Determine from.

As shown in FIG. 13-9, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1 is the same, while PB1-2, PB1 -3, the numbers of judgment values assigned to PB1-4 and PB1-5 are different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 2 pieces are judged for PB1-1, 45 pieces are judged for PB1-2, 150 pieces are judged for PB1-3, 300 pieces are judged for PB1-4, and 500 pieces are judged for PB1-5. A value is assigned to each. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, there are 2 judgment values for PB1-1, 30 judgment values for PB1-2, 135 judgment values for PB1-3, 315 judgment values for PB1-4, and 515 judgment values for PB1-5. assigned to each. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, the variation pattern is the super reach β1, β2 variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. or PB1-5, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do. In other words, in the present feature section 109SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 error variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α1 deviance), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α1 deviation), and PA2 It is determined from -3 (a variation pattern in which super reach α2 is off), PA2-4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is out), and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α1 deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach α2 deviation pattern), and PA2 -4 (a variation pattern in which super reach β1 is off) and PA2-5 (a variation pattern in which super reach β2 is out).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 109SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 to 13-35, the variable display of super reach α1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in this feature section 109SG has a special figure variable display time of 40 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle performance between an ally character A and an enemy character A as a super reach performance. The variable display of Super Reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of Super Reach, it is a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A. It is a variable display that executes.

As shown in FIG. 13-9, as for the jackpot expectation of each variable display in this feature section 109SG, the jackpot expectation of super reach β2 is set to be the highest, and henceforth, super reach β1, super reach α2 , the jackpot expectation is set higher in the order of super reach α1, normal reach, and non-reach (jackpot expectation in each variable display in this feature section 109SG: super reach β2 > super reach β1 > super reach α2 > super reach α1 >Normal Reach > Non-Reach).

In other words, if we pay attention to the variable display of Super Reach, this feature section 109SG can determine whether the ally character displayed as a battle effect (reach effect of Super Reach) is ally character A or ally character B. The expectation level of a jackpot differs depending on the combination of whether the enemy character displayed as the reach effect is enemy character A or enemy character B.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 109SG includes a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 13-10 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 109SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 109SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting section 109SG152. , a game control timer setting section 109SG153, a game control counter setting section 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 109SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passage (approach) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, etc., extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment, are held as pending data. , and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 109SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 109SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the standard figure reservation storage unit 109SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the standard figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 109SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 13-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 13-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 109SG191, a production control timer setting section 109SG192, a production control counter setting section 109SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 109SG194. We are prepared.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 includes a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 109SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various production operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 109SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 109SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 13-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 109SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A of the feature section 109SG, a pending display flag is set to a flag value according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that data can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the figure pending storage.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (square By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. The variable display corresponding to the pending memory display foretells that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting prize opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 13-11(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 13-11(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the main feature section 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be explained based on FIGS. 13-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the on state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 109SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 109SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 109SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 109SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 109SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 109SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 109SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 109SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 109SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 109SGS112). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (step 109 SGS 113). The reserved storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process of step 109SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the starting opening is won. Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 13-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 109SGS112 of FIG. 13-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this characteristic section 109SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIG. 13-12) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 109 SGS 112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 13-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 109SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 109SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 13-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 13-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 109SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-6 2 is selected and set (step 109SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 13-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 109SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 109SGS127), and proceed to step 109SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 109SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 109SGS128). 109SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 109SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 13-9, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and In the fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take, and the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 109SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always determined as non-reach or super reach even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 109SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 13-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 109SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and step Proceed to 109SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 109SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the data, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 109SGS138). In this feature section 109SG, as shown in FIG. 13-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a fluctuation category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 109SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 109SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIGS. 13-14 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the process executed in step S75 in FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 13-14, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening prize designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 109SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 109SGS224).

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is a first starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 109SGS224 is a second starting opening winning designation command (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226 If the received command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), then in step 109SGS228, the received command is the first pending storage number notification command. (109SGS228; Y), and if the received command in step 109SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the free space in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 13-11. It is stored at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of this characteristic unit 162SGS234, if the received command is the first ball output state designation command, it is determined that the ball output state is a low ball output state, and the value of the ball output state flag for production is set to "0". is set (updated), and if the received command is the second ball output state designation command, the ball output state is determined to be the first high ball output state and the value of the production ball output state flag is set to "1". is set (updated), and if the received command is the 3rd ball output state designation command, the ball output state is determined to be the 2nd high ball output state and the value of the production ball output state flag is set to "2". Set (update) to .

In addition, in the command analysis process of the feature unit 109SG, if the received command is any of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending memory number notification command, the received command is used at the starting winning time. Although an example has been given in which the received command is stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area of the received command buffer 109SG194A, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the 1st starting opening prize designation command, the command is used to notify the number of pending storage numbers. If a timer is set to wait for the reception of the number of pending memories, and if no pending memory number notification command is received before the timer times out, the pending memory of the entry that has not received the pending memory number notification command will be processed as described below. It may be set to be excluded from the reading preview performance.

FIG. 13-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 13-15, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and if there is a pending memory (entry) for which the pending display flag is not set, It is determined whether or not there is one (step 109 SGS 242a). If there is no pending memory for which the pending display flag is not set (Step 109SGS242a; N), the prefetch notice setting process is terminated, and if there is any pending memory for which the pending display flag is not set (Step 109SGS242a; Y), Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

In addition, whether or not the super reach reach effect is being executed depends on whether the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether the variable display is being executed or not) and the value of the effect control process flag. If is 2, it may be determined whether or not the super reach effect is being executed by referring to the contents of the process data of the variable display being executed.

If the super reach reach effect is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process advances to step 109SGS250, and if the super reach reach effect is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (the pending display flag is It is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry (not set) is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command that indicates a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process advances to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a loss or a jackpot. If it is a symbol designation command (Step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry is the first symbol designation command (a symbol designation command indicating a loss) (Step 109SGS243b) .

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 109SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, the pre-read at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is performed. By referring to the preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview effect and the display pattern (pre-announcement type) are determined at the determination ratios as shown in FIGS. 13-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 13-16, the presence or absence of a pre-read preview performance and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display will be a white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display. Displayed in area 109SG005U.

In addition, as shown in Figure 13-16, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot", the ratio of display pattern β being determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio of display pattern α being determined. It is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", the rate at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which the display pattern α is determined.

With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The probability of a probability-variable jackpot is increased, and the player's expectation of a probability-variable jackpot can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the display pattern α or the white star in which the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) is always decided to execute the pre-read preview effect. Although one of the display patterns β in which the shape (☆) is displayed is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display pattern β is executed. Similarly to the case where the display result is "miss", a case may be provided in which it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview performance.

In addition, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 109SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is identified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the fluctuation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified that it is a category with a "non-reach" fluctuation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is determined that it is a category of a "super reach" fluctuation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 109SGS247, By referring to the missed advance notice performance determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice performance and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the advance notice performance (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, for example, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratios as shown in FIGS. 13-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-16, the determination ratio of the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern (notice type) is varied depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 109SGS247. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is a white rectangle (◇) in a specific manner in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area. 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a specific form of white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area. It is displayed in the memory display area 109SG005U. Incidentally, when it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not executed, the pending memory display is displayed in a round shape (◯), which is the normal mode, in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D or the second pending memory display area 109SG005U.

As shown in Figure 13-16, if the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "non-conformity". The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than ``no preview effect'') is set higher than in the case of ``Reach''. Also, if the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Super Reach", than when the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Other", The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than "no preview effect") is set high.

When the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the variable category is "other", it is more important than if the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is also set high. Furthermore, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the category of the variable pattern is "other", the category of the variable pattern is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "Super Reach", and the display pattern The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of pre-read preview performances determined to be non-executable regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". is set to the highest value, and the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest value.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be non-executable (no preview effect), and the pre-read preview effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any variable pattern category when the variable display result is “miss”.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss (non-reach)," "miss (super reach)," or "miss (other)," when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the display pattern α The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a "jackpot (probable jackpot)" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the proportion at which display pattern β is determined is the proportion at which display pattern α is determined. is set higher than.

Due to such settings, if display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of advance notice effect, if display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" than the above, and especially when display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "probable variable jackpot". This increases the player's expectations.

After executing step 109SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance was determined in step 109SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) was determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 109SGS249).

After executing step 109SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α in which the pending storage display is indicated by "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β in which the pending storage display is indicated by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

In addition, in step 109SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250) and proceeds to step 109SGS252.

In addition, as described above, even when the reach effect of Super Reach is being executed (Step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (Step 109SGS243a), the entry After setting the hold display flag to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250), the process advances to step 109SGS252.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the starting prize-winning receiving command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the data shown in FIG. 13-17 is As shown, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-17, if the number of first special symbol pending memories is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in Figure 13-17. , if the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed in the display mode of "☆" will be displayed. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D.

Further, if the second special figure pending storage number is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As with the case of the first special figure, if the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display mode of this pending memory display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display format of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the following manner. In addition, if the second special figure pending memory number is two, for example, as shown in Figure 13-17, two pending memory displays will be displayed, and each pending memory display will be the pending display of the corresponding pending memory. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, the pending memory display of 1 is displayed as "○", and the pending memory display of 1 is displayed as "☆" in the second pending memory display area 109SG005U. Is displayed. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 109SG005U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 109SG005U.

Each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and as shown in FIG. 13-17, the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (the screen (towards the center).

In other words, if the pending memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the pending memory of the starting prize receiving command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, the starting winning time after the shift Based on the pending memory of the reception command buffer 109SG194A, the pending memory displays in the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005U are also shifted and displayed, and a new pending memory is created due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the pending memory is determined and set in the pending display flag, and the first pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005D and the second pending memory display area 109SG005D are It will now be displayed in the memory display area 109SG005U.

Note that although this feature section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the process of step 109SGS252 is executed in the prefetch notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 109SG005D The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process different from the prefetch preview setting process (for example, hold display update process).

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 109SGS242, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory for the starting winning. Due to the simultaneous occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole, a new command at the time of starting winning is stored in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing in step 109SGS242. If it is determined that there is, that is, if an entry whose display undetermined flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, both entries are read in advance and announced. This is used to determine whether or not to perform the performance. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting prize winning in the first special drawing was newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing were newly stored are used to determine the execution and non-execution of the pre-announcement effect. If it is determined, if there is no entry for the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-read preview effect, the pending display of the first special figure's pending memory and the pending display of the second special figure will be displayed. Prefetch preview effects may be executed simultaneously on both displays.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, if a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing are newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance. In such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure. It is also possible to decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-read preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a time saving state where high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure This determination is given priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 13-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the on state (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is set to ``1-0'' to ``1-4''. Various command data and various flags stored in association with are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 109SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", It is determined from among the combinations of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999", etc. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109SGS282).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 109SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 109SGS284). Also, a first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). Note that the first time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 stores the image data that is being displayed in a variable manner, including the image data that indicates the display state of the decorative pattern at the center left, into the VRAM every time the first time elapses. The write/display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIG. 13-20).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287). If the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), a second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 every time the first time elapses. Take control. Thereby, movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 13-20).

After executing step 109SGS288, or if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the production process during variable display (step The variable display start setting process is set to a value corresponding to S172) and ends the variable display start setting process (Step 109SGS286).

FIG. 13-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decreases each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer by 1 (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). Further, if the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is decremented by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

In addition, after executing step 109SGS303c, or if the super reach is not variable display (step 109SGS303b; N), the process advances to step 109SGS306.

In step 109SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 109SGS308). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set in the movable body control timer again), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

Note that if the variable display is not a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and if the movable body control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), execute the processing of step 109SGS309h and step 109SGS309i. The process proceeds to step 109SGS310 without any processing.

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms from the time of the previous image update) in the variable display including the left-center right decorative pattern. The image data of the screen to be displayed after the elapsed time is created and written to a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, in the image display device 5, variable display control of decorative patterns and display control of other images (video display control) are realized. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, on the image display device 5, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed. Also, the variable display control timer is reset to the first time (step 109SGS312).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is on (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the production control process flag is set to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special symbol ends), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n times out in the process of step 109SGS306, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

Next, the operation mode of each production device during the ready-to-reach production of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 in the feature section 109SG will be explained. The presentation mode of the variable display will be explained based on FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24.

First, as shown in Figures 13-21 and 13-22, regarding the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, when the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2 starts, the first enlarged display period , the character images displayed on the image display device 5 during the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (for the reach effect of super reach α1, the ally character A and the enemy character A, and for the reach effect of super reach α2) If so, an enlarged display of friendly character A and enemy character B) is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1x) to the display magnification m1, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3 in the third enlarged display period. Then, after the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed. .

Note that in this feature section 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, the difference between the display magnifications is the largest between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3. is the smallest. That is, in this characteristic section 109SG, regarding the enlargement speed of the character image, the enlargement speed during the first enlarged display period is set to be the fastest, and the enlargement speed during the third enlarged display period is set to be the slowest (enlargement speed of character image: (first enlarged display period>second enlarged display period>third enlarged display period). Note that in the feature section 109SG, "the enlargement speed is fast" means that the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large.

Thereafter, in this feature section 109SG, the period that combines the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (the period in which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed) is set as period T2, and the third enlarged display period and the character image The period including the predetermined period during which the display magnification is maintained at m3 may be referred to as period T3.

In addition, as shown in Figure 13-21, during the reach effect of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As a performance to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving the movable body unit 109SG400 to the close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved. A movable body motion effect A is executed to move the movable body unit 109SG400 to the retreat position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-22, during the reach effects of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a failure, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 109SG, the execution period of the movable body effect A and the failure notification effect may be referred to as a period T4. Regarding these periods T2 to T4, period T3 is the shortest period, and period T4 is the longest period (length of period T2 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3).

Also, during the reach effects of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion performance A (only when the variable display result is a jackpot). .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body is A movable body motion suggestion production A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward 109SG401 at a speed V1 is executed.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as part of the above-mentioned movable body motion effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2 over a period T4. It moves (diffuses) toward the edge of the display device 5. Note that the absolute value of the speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of the speed V1. In other words, the movable body motion representation A in the main feature section 109SG is also a representation in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves faster than the movable body motion suggestion representation A.

Furthermore, during the reach effects of super reach α1 and super reach α2, the movable body LED 109SG495 also emits light. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, the movable LED 109SG495 is activated during the period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and during the period T3 (more precisely, during the period T3). The movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at the brightness C1 from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Further, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 109SG495 is caused to emit light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1 over a period T4.

Also, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of performance sounds can be output from speakers 8L and 8R: BGM of music, SE (sound effects), action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound. The type of sound that is output varies depending on the time during the reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-22, the BGM is the effect sound that is output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. output is stopped. That is, the output of BGM in the ready-to-win performance is executed over the period T4 from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance to the end timing of the period T2.

Also, like BGM, SE (sound effect) is a production sound that is output from speakers 8L and 8R from the start of variable display, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which the output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. . In other words, the output of SE in the ready-to-win performance is executed over the entire ready-to-win performance.

The motion suggestion sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the movable body motion suggestion production A. In other words, the motion suggestion sound is output only during period T2, which is the execution period of movable body motion suggestion performance A, and is not output during other periods. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R as part of the movable body movement effect A. That is, the jackpot notification sound is output only during the period T4, which is the execution period of the movable body motion performance A when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, and is not output during other periods.

As shown in Figures 13-23 and 13-24, regarding the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, when the reach effects of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2 are started, the first enlarged display period, Character images displayed on the image display device 5 in the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (ally character B and enemy character A in the reach effect of super reach β1, and character images displayed in the reach effect of super reach β2) Enlarged display of friendly character B and enemy character B) is executed.

From now on, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, the light emission mode of the movable body LED109SG495, the output of BGM, SE, action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown in Figure 13- 21 and FIGS. 13-22, the explanation will be omitted since this is the same mode as the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach α2.

As shown in Figure 13-23, during the reach effect of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display will be displayed from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As a performance to notify that the display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R are moved to positions close to the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their respective retracted positions. A movable body motion effect B is executed to move (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-24, during the reach effects of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a failure, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, a failure notification effect is executed to notify that the variable display result is a failure. The movable body performance B is a performance that is executed over a period T4, like the above-mentioned movable body performance A and the failure notification performance.

Also, during the reach effects of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 13-23 and 13-24, over the aforementioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period), A movable body motion suggestion performance B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retreat position and the suggested position. Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position in the movable body motion suggestion performance B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 ( Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4>period T2>period T3>period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. While the motion suggestion performance is executed, the movable body motion suggestion performance is not executed during the third enlarged display period. Further, among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is the fastest in the first enlarged display period (the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large), and the During the enlarged display period, the character image enlargement speed is set to be slowest (image enlargement rate per unit time is small).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-26(A), when comparing movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion suggestion performance B, movable body motion suggestion performance A shows a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. 109SG005S acts repeatedly on the first movable body 109SG401 (multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself The difference is that the movable body motion suggestion performance B does not move, whereas the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retreat position and the suggested position. On the other hand, movable body motion suggestion performance A and movable body motion suggestion performance B both have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

As shown in FIG. 13-26(B), when comparing movable body motion performance A and movable body motion performance B, movable body motion performance A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retreat position to the performance position, and , move the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the production position (change the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and This is an effect in which a star-shaped effect image 109SG005S spreads from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2. Movable body movement performance B moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retreat position to the performance position, and moves the second movable body 109SG402L and third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the performance position. This is an effect of moving the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state, and the display in which multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are spread from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed of V2 is not executed. This is different from movable body motion performance A. Furthermore, movable body motion performance A and movable body motion performance B both have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

Next, the display mode of the reach effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 will be explained based on FIGS. 13-27 to 13-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 13-27(A) and 13-27(B), after a while after the variable display of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, or Super Reach β2 starts, , the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R stop at a combination indicating reach. Then, when a predetermined period of time further passes in the reach state, if the variable display is the variable display of super reach α1, a battle effect between friendly character A and enemy character A is started as a reach effect (Figure 13-27 (C ) and Figure 13-28 (A)), and if the variable display is that of Super Reach α2, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character B will start as a reach effect (see Figure 13-27 (D) and (See Figure 13-30 (A)), if the variable display is super reach β1, a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A will start as a reach effect (see Figures 13-27 (E) and 13 -32 (A)), if the variable display is the variable display of super reach β2, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character B will start as a reach effect (Figure 13-27 (F) and Figure 13- 34(A)).

In addition, at the start of these super reach reach performances, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed at the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The ornamental symbols that have been displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" ornamental symbols are temporarily rendered invisible.

As shown in Figures 13-28 (A) and 13-28 (B), when reaching the second half of the battle performance that is the reach performance of Super Reach α1, as shown in Figure 13-28 (C), allies Display of a moving image in which character A attacks enemy character A is started. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 13-28(C) to 13-28(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character A In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character A, images of friendly character A and enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 13-28(D) to 13-28(F)), the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed first on the image display device 5. It is displayed with lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figures 13-28 (A) to 13-28 (C)), and the images of friendly character A and enemy character A, which have low contrast, are overlapped. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 (movable body motion suggestion effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period. It is now easier to recognize the movement towards the target.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 13-28(E) to 13-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Display at. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 13-29 (H) and FIG. 13-29 (I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body movement effect A, the ally character A and the enemy character are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edges of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. Ru.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 13-29 (J) and 13-29 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character A is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 13-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 13-30 (A) and 13-30 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as a reach performance of Super Reach α2, as shown in Figure 13-30 (C) , the display of a moving image in which friendly character A attacks enemy character B begins. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 13-30(C) to 13-30(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character A In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character B, images of friendly character A and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 13-30(D) to 13-30(F)), the images of friendly character A and enemy character B are It is displayed with lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (Figures 13-30 (A) to 13-30 (C)), and the images of friendly character A and enemy character B, which have low contrast, are overlapped. , an image in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 (movable body motion suggestion effect A) is displayed. At this time, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period. It is now easier to recognize the movement towards the target.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 13-31 (G) to FIG. 13-31 (I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body movement effect A, the ally character A and the enemy character are displayed in the center of the image display device 5. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at the speed V2. Ru.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 13-31 (J) and 13-31 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character A is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and it is reported that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 13-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 13-32 (A) and 13-32 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as the reach performance of Super Reach β1, as shown in Figure 13-32 (C) Then, a moving image of friendly character B attacking enemy character A is started to be displayed. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 13-32(C) to 13-32(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character B In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character A, images of friendly character B and enemy character A are displayed in an enlarged manner.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (the movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG 400 are repeatedly executed).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-32(D) and 13-32(E), during the enlarged display period of the images of ally character B and enemy character A, the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, The enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIG. 13-33 (G) to FIG. 13-33 (I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body motion effect B, ally character B and enemy character An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the character A image.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 13-33 (J) and 13-33 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character A is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character B is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and a notification is made that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss). At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 13-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 13-34 (A) and 13-34 (B), when reaching the latter half of the battle performance (reach performance) as the reach performance of Super Reach β2, as shown in Figure 13-34 (C). , the display of a moving image in which friendly character B attacks enemy character B begins. In the video, as shown in FIGS. 13-34(C) to 13-34(F), during the aforementioned first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, ally character B In a scene where a melee attack is to be applied to enemy character B, images of friendly character B and enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (the movable body unit The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG 400 are repeatedly executed).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-34 (D) and 13-34 (E), during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A, the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, The enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 emits light at the brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the friendly character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that during the predetermined period, the movable body LED 109SG495 does not emit light.

As shown in FIGS. 13-35 (G) to 13-35 (I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, as a movable body motion effect B, the ally character B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. An explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The type effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the production position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the production position. (The movable unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

Thereafter, after the operation of each movable body ends (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 ends, the first movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state. A video in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. is displayed, and it is announced that the jackpot gaming state is being controlled. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) as numerical values corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop at a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in FIGS. 13-35 (J) and 13-35 (K), as a failure notification effect, the attack of the enemy character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ally. A display of an action in which the character B is hit and the ally character is defeated is executed, and a notification is made that the jackpot game state is not controlled (that the game is a loss).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each "right" decorative pattern display area 5C) are displayed at a low speed (Fig. After moving from above the image display device 5 at a speed lower than that at the time of jackpot shown in 13-29 (I), it swings and stops at the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, as shown in 10-31 to 13-35. On the other hand, while the movable body movement effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the image of the friendly character or enemy character during the reach effect is enlarged by displaying the explosion effect image 109SG005B. Since the performance of the movable body motion performance B by the display and the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the game enjoyment can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, since the speed of enlarging each character's image is different between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the production effect during the enlarged display period can be improved. Since the operating speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load on the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body movement performance can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, the second enlarged display period has a slower enlargement speed than the first enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period after the movable body motion suggestion effect ends. Since the enlargement speed is slower than the second enlarged display period, the enlarged display of the images of the friendly character and the enemy character continues even after the movable body motion suggestion performance ends, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, although the mode in which the enlargement speed in the first enlarged display period is the fastest and the enlargement speed in the third enlarged display period is the slowest is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the enlargement speed in the third enlarged display period is the slowest. The expansion speed in the third expansion display period may be the fastest, the expansion speed in the first expansion display period may be the slowest, or the expansion speed in the second expansion display period may be the fastest.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 13-21 to 13-24, the execution of the pre-read preview effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period. This can prevent the attention of people from decreasing. Note that although this feature section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the execution of the pre-read notice effect is restricted throughout the execution period of the reach effect, the present invention is not limited to this; The period during which execution of the performance is limited may be only a part of the reach performance (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). Furthermore, in this feature section 109SG, as a form of restricting the execution of the advance notice performance, a mode in which the advance notice performance is not executed during the reach performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , During the reach effect, the advance notice effect may be executed at a lower rate than in other periods.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 and 13-34, the player can visually confirm the reach effect while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, but as shown in FIGS. 13-33 and 13-35, In addition, during the execution of the movable body action effect B, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of the reach effect. In other words, the visibility of the reach effect performance images (images of ally characters and enemy characters) changes depending on the operating status of the first movable body 109SG401, so the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 changes as a movable body motion suggestion effect. It is possible to easily understand whether the motion is a motion or a motion as a movable body motion effect, and the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the reach effect effect image can be adjusted.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 and 13-23, while the movable body motion suggestion performance is being executed, BGM, SE, and motion suggestion sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion performance is being executed. During the game, BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sound are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, so they are output from the speakers 8L and 8R before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body movement performance. To make it easier for a player to recognize that the performance sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position. Yes, the period T3 is a shorter period than the period T2 in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed, so the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion production is the same as the motion of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion production. It is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the moving body motion is the same, and also to reduce the interest in the game due to the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance being longer than the execution period of the movable body motion production in the suggested reach performance. It is also possible to prevent the decline.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body movement performance or the failure notification performance, the movable body LED 109SG495 During the period in which the light is off, the player can easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-32 and 13-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 13-33 and 13-35, the movable body In motion production B, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all operated, so it is difficult to determine whether the motion of the movable body is a motion suggesting a movable body motion or not. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between motions and motions.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, in the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C1, and the movable body movement is produced. During execution, the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at a brightness C2 that is higher than the brightness C1, so the brightness of the movable body LED 109SG495 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the movable body movement performance is being executed. It is also possible to improve the game's interest during execution of the movable body movement performance.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 and 13-30, while the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach effects are displayed. The effect images (images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, while the moving body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, the effect image of the reach effect is displayed. Since the visibility of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is reduced, the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can stand out, and the movement of these star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. Therefore, the performance effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-29 and 13-31, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed at a speed V2 which is higher than the speed V1 on the image display device 5. Since the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5, it is possible to make the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in the movable body motion production A, and also to By moving the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, so that the production effect of the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced, which increases the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 (F) and 13-30 (F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the deviation notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the performance to be executed from now on is a movable body movement performance or a failure notification performance.

Although the characteristic part 109SG of this invention has been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the gist of this invention, this invention will not affect the scope of this invention. included.

For example, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, , exemplifies a form in which the start timing of the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position and the start timing of the enlarged display of the reach effect production image (images of the friendly character and enemy character) are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance is set to a timing earlier than the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion production is performed. can increase the attention of players.

Further, in the characteristic portion 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period and the display state of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period are almost the same (the display magnification is slightly different). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a modified example 109SG-2, after the enlarged display period ends, a specific effect is displayed on the image display device 5. The display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period may be changed by displaying an image or an effect image. By doing so, after the enlarged display period ends, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended.

In addition, the feature section 109SG has a form that allows the image display device 5 to display an explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movements of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and as Modified Example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 displays images according to the progress of a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character, which is executed as a reach performance. It may also be possible to display an effect image.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle production, The size of the explosion effect image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle performance may be made different. By doing this, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size that corresponds to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle performance during the reach performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both an explosion effect image 109SG005B that corresponds to the movement of the movable body and an effect image that corresponds to the progress of the battle production, the explosion effect that corresponds to the movement of these movable bodies can be displayed. The image transparency may be made different between the image 109SG005B and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle performance. By doing this, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle performance during the reach performance, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

Further, in the characteristic section 109SG, the friendly character and the enemy character are visually recognized on the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the movable body motion suggestion production and enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body motion production or failure notification production. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modification 109SG-4, after the movable body motion suggestion performance and the enlarged display period have ended, the movable body motion performance or miss notification is performed. During the period up to the start timing of the performance, the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 are set to a first low visibility state that is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, thereby reducing the visibility of friendly characters and enemy characters. You may let them. Furthermore, when performing a movable body movement effect (when the variable display result is a jackpot), by changing the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 from the first low visibility state to a second low visibility state, which is even lower, The visibility of friendly characters and enemy characters may be further reduced. By doing this, after the enlarged display period ends, the visibility of the friendly characters and enemy characters on the image display device 5 decreases, so that the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended. When performing the movable body effect, it is possible to increase attention to the operations of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 to 13-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect. (The same friendly character and enemy character) are shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-5, when the movable body movement performance is being executed, Different effect images may be displayed on the image display device 5. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is determined from the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body movement suggestion effect. You can also increase the number. By doing this, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggesting effect is being executed, and therefore it is possible to improve the game enjoyment when the movable body movement suggesting effect is being executed. .

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 to 13-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during execution of the movable body movement effect. (The same friendly character and enemy character) are shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-6, during the execution of the moving body motion suggestion effect, While the image display device 5 displays images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance, while the movable body motion performance is being executed, the image display device 5 displays images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance. As the image corresponding to the body motion effect, an image different from the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be displayed.

Furthermore, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying images compatible with movable body motion suggestion effects and images compatible with movable body movement effects, the display period of images compatible with movable body motion suggestion effects and the display period of images compatible with movable body movement effects may be set. It may be different. By doing this, the images corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance and the images corresponding to the movable body motion performance It becomes possible to display the display at an appropriate period corresponding to whether it is the execution of a movable body motion effect or the execution of a movable body motion effect.

Furthermore, when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion effects on the image display device 5, the visibility of the image compatible with movable body motion effects may be reduced by lowering the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5. By doing this, when the movable body motion performance is executed, the player's attention can be increased to the movable body motion performance rather than the image corresponding to the movable body motion performance.

Further, when displaying an image compatible with movable body motion suggestion performance on the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is output from the speaker 8L8R, and at the same time, the image display device 5 When displaying an image compatible with movable body movement effects in , the speaker 8L8R may output a sound corresponding to the movable body movement effects corresponding to the image compatible with movable body movement effects. By doing so, it is possible to output sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R when performing the movable body motion suggestion production and when performing the movable body motion production. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion production or the movable body motion production is in progress.

Furthermore, when performing a movable body motion performance during the reach performance (when the variable display result becomes a jackpot), the movable body motion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 from a timing before the start of the movable body motion performance. Display of an image corresponding to body movement performance may be started. By doing this, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the start of the movable body motion performance during the reach performance of the super reach, and it is also possible to increase attention to the movable body motion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, in the reach effect of super reach α1 and super reach α2, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 toward the first movable body 109SG401 as movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although a mode in which the display is displayed moving at the speed V1 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range. It may be variable. In this case, for example, as movable body motion suggestion production A, when a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is set to the first movable body 109SG401. The speed V1 is changed to a low speed as the speed V1 approaches . Note that the speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S during execution of the movable body motion production A may be set to be faster than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing this, when the movable body motion suggestion effect A is executed, the moving speed (velocity V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In addition, the characteristic section 109SG outputs 1 action suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion presentation, and outputs 1 jackpot notification from the speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion presentation. Although the form in which sound is output has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from these speakers 8L and 8R. .

Furthermore, in the case where multiple sounds can be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, multiple output start timings of the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound are provided, and the operation can be performed at any of the timings. It may be possible to output different sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the output of the suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound is started. By doing this, the player can easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion production or the movable body motion production is being executed by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and also Since these action suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change, the game's interest can be improved.

In particular, when determining the output timing of the motion suggestion sound from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different rates depending on the variable display result. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the output of the action suggestion sound starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Further, when determining the output timing of the jackpot notification sound from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different rates depending on the type of jackpot or the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In this case, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the output of the jackpot notification sound starts, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the characteristic section 109SG moves the first movable body 109SG401 at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24. Although a mode of reciprocating movement is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first movable body 109SG401 is reciprocated between the retreat position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion production, , the first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retreated position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at a position near the retreated position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait at the retreat position until the movable body motion performance or the deviation notification performance is started. The present invention is not limited to this, but after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to stand by at the suggested position until the movable body motion performance or miss notification performance is started. Good too. By doing so, when the movable body motion performance is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the performance position, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. Furthermore, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggested position after the movable body motion suggestion performance is finished, it is possible to arouse the player's expectations for the execution of the movable body motion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-21 to 13-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is different between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion production and the execution of the movable body motion production. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is made different between when the movable body motion suggestion production is executed and when the movable body motion production is executed. Good too.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-20, the characteristic section 109SG also controls updating of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, and controls movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) respectively based on control timers, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect images displayed on the image display device 5 and the movement control of the movable body In addition to the movement control, the lighting control of the LED provided in the pachinko game machine 1, the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. may also be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

In addition, when performing update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, movement control of the movable body, lighting control of the LED, and output control of the effect sound in this way, for example, the effect control image is updated every 1 ms. The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (executes S73 to S77 of the production control main processing shown in FIG. 8 every 1 ms), updates the production image every 33 ms, controls the movement of the movable body every 1 ms, and controls the LED. The lighting control may be executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the performance sound may be executed every 1 ms. In particular, when executing the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, the movement control of the movable body (motor 109SG421 for the first movable body, motor 109SG422 for the second movable body, motor 109SG422 for the third movable body, Since the drive control of the motor 109SG423) is executed together, the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound can be suitably executed.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 109SG495 may emit light in a plurality of ways. The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be changed depending on the manner in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion performance.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, a mode in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes are provided for the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S to be displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion production A, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in any of the modes as the movable body motion suggestion production A. The rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled may be varied depending on the situation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-25, the characteristic section 109SG displays a reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position (movable body motion suggestion effect) during the third enlarged display period. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the reciprocating motion of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is performed even during the third enlarged display period. You may set up a case. In particular, in some cases where the variable display result is a jackpot, the first movable body 109SG401 can reciprocate between the retracted position and the suggested position during the third enlarged display period. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position during the display period, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestion effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retreat position and the suggested position. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the execution of movable body motion performance A or movable body motion performance B is suggested by repeatedly moving (movable body motion suggestion performance B), this invention is not limited to this, and these specific Execution of the movable body movement effect A or the movable body movement effect B may be suggested in a manner other than the display of the image or the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, if the first movable body 109SG401 is equipped with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the feature section 109SG, the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion is determined by lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED. It may also suggest that performance B be performed.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 13-28 and 13-30, the contrast between the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is used as a movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed in a reduced state (see FIGS. 13-28 (D) and 13-30 (D)), the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is performed at a timing before lowering the contrast between the image of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-28(C) The display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started from the timing shown in FIG. 13-30(C).

Note that when starting to display the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at a timing before lowering the contrast between the images of the friendly character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B on the image display device 5 in this way, By increasing the transmittance (transparency) of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image being displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. 13-28 and 13-30, friendly character A and enemy character A) Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be made more visible than when the contrast is lowered.

In addition, in the feature section 109SG, as shown in FIG. 13-29(G), an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body motion effect is executed; Although a part of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion becomes invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image may be displayed when the movable body movement effect is executed. It is also possible to display the explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to the movable body movement effect in the entire display area of the device 5, and make all other effect images invisible.

Further, in the feature section 109SG, a mode is illustrated in which the movable body motion performance is executed during the reach performance of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing to execute the movable body motion performance may be as follows: It may be performed at a timing other than during the reach performance of Super Reach. For example, as modification example 109SG-8, the combinations of decorative patterns are It may be possible to perform the movable body motion performance during the period from when the reach is reached until the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 13-36(B), the moving body movement suggestion effect is started after reaching the reach, and the image display device 5 displays the reach effect to be executed after this with high expectations (jackpot). (for example, reach performances of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature section 109SG) and low expectation level (big hit game state) Which of the reach performances (for example, reach performances with lower expectations than the reach performances of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature section 109SG) As a branching effect that displays an image of a character with its eyes closed as a branching effect to notify whether to branch to a branch, as shown in FIG. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 13-37(C) to 13-37(E). The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character there opening its eyes. In other words, in this branching effect, the character displayed on the image display device 5 may go dark without opening its eyes, so that a reach effect with high expectations will not be executed (a reach effect with low expectations will be executed). be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branching effect is completed), a low-expectation ready-to-reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that executes a reach effect with high expectations, the variable display is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 13-37(F) to 13-37(H). By opening the eyes of the character who is playing the game, it is announced that a highly anticipated reach effect will be executed. Moreover, at this time, a movable body motion effect is also executed. Then, after the movable body motion performance and the branch performance are completed, a highly anticipated reach performance is executed.

In other words, the movable body motion performance may be executed as a performance to notify that the jackpot game state will be controlled as exemplified in the feature section 109SG, but it may also be performed as a performance to notify that a highly expected reach performance will be executed. It may be performed as a performance (a performance that notifies that the expectation level of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state is high).

In addition, in this modified example 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 13-36(B) and 13-37(C), the character with its eyes closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branch effect on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character whose eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branch effect, the image display device 5 At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as a concentrated line, the player may be able to draw attention to whether or not the character opens its eyes.

As described above, in the feature section 109SG, the present invention is applied as a branch for determining whether or not the variable display result becomes a jackpot during the reach effect of Super Reach. As shown, the present invention may be applied to determine which of the low-expectation ready-to-reach effects and high-expectations ready-to-reach effects are to be executed. In this case, the specific image in this invention is an image of a character (the first specific image is an image of a character with its eyes closed, the second specific image is an image of a character with its eyes open), an effect image in this invention corresponds to the above-mentioned image of concentrated lines, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-36 and 13-37, in this modification example 109SG-8, when performing the movable body movement performance as a performance to notify that a highly anticipated reach performance will be executed, Although a form in which the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed before the execution of the movable body motion performance is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body motion suggestion performance may not be executed. Further, the execution rate of the movable body motion performance may be different between when the movable body motion suggestion performance is executed and when the movable body motion suggestion performance is not performed (the rate at which the highly expected ready-to-reach performance is executed is different). (Explanation regarding characteristic part 162SG)
Next, the feature section 162SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 162SG) in the embodiment of this invention will be described. The pachinko game machine 162SG001 having the characteristic part 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 with the basic configuration described above, and the same configurations with the same reference numerals as the basic configuration will be referred to here. The description will be omitted, and the characteristic configuration of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 having the characteristic section 162SG that is different from the pachinko game machine 1 having the basic configuration will be described below.

FIG. 14-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature section 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature section 162SG, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, At the lower left side of the gaming area, there is a variable display time extension described below for adjusting the number of gaming balls that are paid out (given to the player) in a unit period due to the determination of a high ball state. A high ball status notification LED 162SG071 is provided so as to be visible to the player to notify by lighting that adjustment or jackpot period extension adjustment is being performed.

These high ball status notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11 like the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, and are connected to the main board 11 (microcomputer for game control). 100), the lighting/extinguishing of the lights is controlled by executing the ball dispensing state determination process (see Figure 14-13), which will be described later, and the control cycle of these lighting/extinguishing is based on the first special symbol The control period is the same as that of the display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 of the feature section 162SG, the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed when the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 lights up and the high ball state is determined. It is now possible to confirm (understand) the

FIG. 14-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 162SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 14-2(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-2(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 14-2 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit". Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state in pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command 96XXH is a ball release state designation command that designates the determination status of ball release state determination in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001. In the ball dispensing state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the judgment situation of the ball dispensing state determination, as shown in FIG. 14-2(C). As a specific example, the command 9600H is a command that specifies ball output state 1 corresponding to a low ball output state that is not determined to be a high ball output state, and the command 9601H is a command that specifies a ball output state 1 that corresponds to a low ball output state that is not determined to be a high ball output state, and a command 9601H is set when the number of successive jackpots is the first determination number (5 The ball output state 2 designation command corresponds to the judgment state in which the number of consecutive jackpots is less than the second judgment number (10 times). This is a ball release state 3 designation command corresponding to a determination state that has been determined to be a second high ball output state that is equal to or greater than 2 determination times (10 times).

Command 97XXH is a command that notifies the number of consecutive hits after determination, which is the number of jackpots that have occurred in the determined high ball state since it was determined to be a high ball state, and corresponds to the number of consecutive hits after determination. By setting the EXT data, the number of consecutive games after determination is specified on the production control board 12 side based on the EXT data.

Command 98XXH is a command to notify the remaining number of variable displays after determination, which is the number of variable displays executed after the high ball state was determined (including the number of variable displays after the end of the high base state). By setting the EXT data corresponding to the remaining display number, the variable remaining display number after determination is specified on the production control board 12 side by the EXT data.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable, non-probable variable, sudden probability) and a small hit as a winning determination result. It is. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 14-2 (A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 14-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 14-3, in this feature section 162SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 14-4(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 162SG, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure Separate display result determination tables may be used for the figure and the second special figure.

The display result determination table 1 provides variable display results in a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before a confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to to determine whether or not to treat the variable display result as a "jackpot" and control the jackpot game state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is a table that

In the display result determination table 1 in this feature section 162SG, the special figure A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result of whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to. In the display result determination table 1 in this feature section 162SG, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). ” is assigned to the special figure display result. As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, when it is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 162SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 162SG). /30). That is, in the display result determination table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is a variable probability state (high probability state), the probability that the control is determined to be a jackpot gaming state is determined compared to when the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the value becomes high.

Further, FIG. 14-4(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 2 provides a variable display result in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A and a special pattern game using the second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B. Before a confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed, to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the display result determination table 2 in this feature section 162SG, the special figure A numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR1 for display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not to control the special figure display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the display result determination table 2 in the feature section 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small win" is different depending on whether it is a first special symbol game or a second special symbol game. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 14-5(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 162SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 162SG using FIG. 14-5(B), in this feature section 162SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that shifts, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that shifts to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) variable probability jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on "Probable Variable Jackpot C", a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds), and a special This is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games. Furthermore, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are not executed.

Also, although not particularly illustrated, the small winning game state in the feature section 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this feature section 162SG). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

In other words, in this feature section 162SG, if it is determined to be a "probable variable jackpot C" or "small win", a variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in Figure 14-6). At the same time, as a variable display result, the chance number is displayed in a stopped state, and furthermore, since the opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 7 are the same, from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7, , since it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "probable variable jackpot C" in which the variable probability control is executed or a "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the variable probability control being executed, After the end of the jackpot game or the small win game, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while making him/her expect that the probability change control is being executed.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A and the probability variable jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 162SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In addition, a jackpot that occurs in a low base state may be described as a first jackpot (first hit), and a jackpot that occurs in a time-saving state (high probability high base state and low probability high base state) is referred to as a consecutive jackpot (consecutive jackpot). In some cases, it is written as "Sho hitori". Further, the period of the jackpot state and high base state from the time when the first jackpot (initial hit) occurs until the state is controlled to the normal state thereafter is also referred to as the consecutive winning period (advantageous period). In addition, in this feature section 162SG, even if a variable probability jackpot C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the corresponding jackpot, so the variable probability jackpot C is not treated as the first jackpot (first hit), but it is a jackpot in the variable probability state after the variable probability jackpot C. When this occurs, the corresponding jackpot is regarded as the first jackpot (first hit), but this invention is not limited to this, and these certain variable jackpots C are regarded as the first jackpot (first hit), and the corresponding certain variable jackpot C The subsequent high-probability-low base state period may also be included in the consecutive winning period (advantageous period).

Although not implemented in this feature section 162SG, instead of the variable probability jackpot C, a sudden time-saving jackpot that changes the gaming state after the jackpot to a low probability high base state may be provided, and in this case, Suddenly, the time-saving jackpot becomes the first jackpot (first hit).

Furthermore, for example, when a time-saving symbol (for example, a stop symbol of 137 or a stop symbol dedicated to time-saving that is not displayed in the variable display) is derived and displayed as a stop symbol, a round game is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is released. In this way, when the normal state is directly controlled to the high base state, the start of the high base state is the timing of the start of the consecutive winning period (advantageous period). becomes.

In other words, the consecutive winning period (advantageous period) is the period from the time when the normal state is controlled to either the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) until the time when it is controlled to the normal state afterwards. It is.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-5(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 14-5 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 14-6 shows a variation pattern in the main feature section 162SG. In this feature section 162SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. Note that although this feature section 162SG provides only one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a plurality of normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. It may be provided. Furthermore, a plurality of super reach variation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, . . . .

In addition, the fluctuation pattern in this feature section 162SG includes a special winning fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C"). PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 14-6, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern is executed in the feature section 162SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 14-7 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 162SG. In this feature section 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-7, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. is determined from PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot) and PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the corresponding jackpot variation pattern determination table A to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot). (variation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot variation pattern).

As shown in FIG. 14-7, the numbers of determination values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2 are different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 498 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 747 determination values are assigned to PB1-2. In other words, in this feature section 162SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variation jackpot B, the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot PB1. Since the value is determined to be -2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this feature section 162SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C and when the variable display result is a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, determine the variation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach variation pattern) do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach out of reach), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out of reach), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach out of reach). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. It is determined from PA2-1 (a time-saving shortening variation pattern that is out of reach for non-reach), PA2-1 (a variation pattern that is out of normal reach), and PA2-2 (a variation pattern that is out of super reach).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 162SG is "off", the special figure is The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the ball output state will be explained using FIG. 14-8. The ball output status flag in FIG. 14-8 is a flag that is updated by the ball output status determination process shown in FIG. 14-13, which will be described later. This flag is set to ``1'' when the ball is in a high ball output state, and is set to ``2'' when the ball is in the second high ball output state. It is possible to specify whether the state is a low ball state, a first high ball state, or a second high ball state.

The variable display time of each variation pattern corresponding to the low ball output state where the ball output status flag is set to "0" is the same as the variable display time of each variation pattern shown in Figure 14-6. The variable display time corresponding to the case where the state flag is set to "0" is not extended, but the variable display time corresponding to the first high ball output state where the ball release state flag is set to "1" is variable. The variable display time is the variable display time of the variable pattern of non-reach out of reach (PA1-1 to PA1-4) which has a high appearance frequency, and the variable display time of the variable pattern of non-reach out of reach (PA1-1 to PA1-4) which corresponds to "0" in the ball release status flag. 4) If a variable display time longer than the variable display time of the variation pattern is set and extended, and the ball release status flag is set to "1", the extended variable display time is By performing variable display of out-of-reach results, the average variable display time becomes longer.

In addition, the variable display time of the variable pattern corresponding to the second high ball release state where the ball release state flag is set to "2" is the non-reach out of reach (PA1-1 to PA1-4) that appears frequently and the normal reach. The variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of miss (PA2-1) and normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) is changed to non-reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) and normal reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) corresponding to "1" in the ball release status flag. PA2-1) and the variable display time that is longer than the variable display time of the normal reach jackpot variable pattern is set and extended, and if the ball release status flag is set to "2", these extensions will be extended. The average variable display time becomes even longer by executing the variable display of non-reach out, normal reach out, and normal reach jackpot in the variable display time.

Regarding the non-reach PA1-1, which is a non-shortened variable pattern, these extended variable display times are 1 second in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1"; In the second high ball output state where the state flag is "2", it is 1.5 seconds, and for non-reach PA1-2 to non-reach PA1-4, which is a shortening variation pattern, the ball output state flag is "1". In the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2", it is 0.5 seconds, and in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2", it is 1.0 seconds, and the reach fluctuation pattern is PA2. -1 and PB1-1, it is 0 seconds in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1", and in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2". It is 5 seconds.

Note that the extended length of the variable display time shown in FIG. 14-8 is just an example, and the extended length may be different from these lengths. For example, in the second high ball output state, the extension may be longer than the extension in the first high ball output state.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 14-8, by extending the fluctuation pattern of non-reach, which is executed more frequently due to a high decision ratio, and the fluctuation pattern of normal reach, which is executed more frequently than super reach, In addition to efficiently increasing the average variable display time, data capacity can be increased by storing multiple pieces of data by extending the variable display time for variable patterns such as Reach and Super Reach, which have a large amount of data related to performance due to the long variable display time. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, it is possible to prevent an increase in The variable display time may be uniformly added to and extended, and during these extended periods, a common effect using common effect data may be executed in each variable pattern.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 14-8, in the first high ball output state where the ball output status flag is "1", only the non-reaching fluctuation pattern is extended, and when the ball output status flag is "2", In the same way that the reach variation pattern is also extended when the second high ball payout state is reached, by increasing the number of variation patterns that are subject to extension in the second high ball payout state, the average variable display time can be further increased. Although the present invention is designed to be able to extend the length efficiently, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the ball output status flag is "2", the variation pattern is extended when the ball output status flag is "1". It may also be possible to prevent the control load related to the extension from increasing excessively by further extending the ball so that the fluctuation pattern of the extension target does not change depending on the ball release state. .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 14-8, not only the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time saving state (high base state), which is a gaming state in which variable display is executed during the consecutive game period, but also the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4, which will be described later. In order to be able to cope with the case where a jackpot occurs again with a small number of variable displays after the consecutive winning period (advantageous period) ends and the control is returned to the normal state, these consecutive winning periods (advantageous period) end. In order to be able to extend the variable display in the normal state when this occurs, the variation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3 corresponding to the normal state are also extended. The invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to extend only the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state), which is a gaming state in which variable display is performed during the consecutive game period. .

The RAM 102 in the feature section 162SG includes a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The data holding area 162SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 162SG153, a game control counter setting section 162SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 162SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section 162SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section 162SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern holding storage section 162SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 162SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 162SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of a plurality of types of flags including the above-mentioned ball release state flag.

The game control timer setting section 162SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting section 162SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 162SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting section 162SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-1 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, for example, for performance control as shown in FIG. 14-10(A). A data holding area 162SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 162SG190 shown in FIG. 14-10(A) includes a production control flag setting section 162SG191, a production control timer setting section 162SG192, a production control counter setting section 162SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 162SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 162SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting section 162SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the performance control timer setting section 162SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 162SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 162SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 162SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section 162SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 162SG, data constituting a starting winning reception command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. 14-10(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 162SG194. The start winning command buffer 162SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are determined later when the start condition is met and variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition has been met, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" are It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when ending the process.

Furthermore, in the startup winning reception command buffer 162SG194A of the feature section 162SG, there is information indicating whether or not the display pattern has not yet been determined in conjunction with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance in the pre-read notice setting process (FIG. 9). In other words, due to the occurrence of a new starting prize, the display pattern has not yet been determined because the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are newly stored. A display undetermined flag indicating , and a pending display flag to which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display, respectively corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with a buffer number.

In addition, the start-up winning command buffer 162SG194A of this feature section 162SG has a storage area so that the effect restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory. is secured for each storage area (entry). In addition, the production restriction flag means that, in the command analysis process (Figure 14-22), a starting prize has occurred in the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole, but the symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and number of pending memories are detected. This is a flag indicating that the entry is not a target of the prefetch preview performance when the notification command is not received within a first pending storage number notification waiting time or a second pending storage number notification waiting time, which will be described later.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (square By setting (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), a special mode of display of pending memory different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U. The variable display corresponding to the pending memory display foretells that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

The performance control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A when a starting prize is entered into the first starting prize opening. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the starting winning reception command buffer 162SG194A. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The commands stored in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A shown in FIG. 14-10(B) are sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 14-10(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing of the feature section 162SG will be explained based on FIG. 14-11. As shown in FIG. 14-11, the gaming control main processing of this feature section 162SG also executes almost the same processing as the gaming control main processing in the basic configuration of FIG. 4, but the characteristics of the gaming control main processing of this feature section 162SG are The difference is that the contents of the recovery process in S4 are different, and in addition to the initialization process in step S6a, a process in step S6b regarding the initial setting of the ball release state flag is added.

In the recovery process of step S4 of the game control main process of the feature unit 162SG, a process of restoring the ball release state flag to the state before the power cut is executed. As will be described later, in the power outage process in step S19 in the gaming control timer interrupt process of the feature unit 162SG shown in FIG. 14-12, the backup data stored when the power outage occurs includes Contains data on the flag value of the ball release status flag at the time.

As for the specific recovery status of the ball output state flag, when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" corresponding to a low ball output state when a power outage occurs, the ball output state flag is set to "0" by the recovery process. is set, and when the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball dispensing state when a power outage occurs, the recovery process sets the ball dispensing state flag to "1" and when a power outage occurs, When the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "2" corresponding to the second ball dispensing state, "2" is set in the ball dispensing state flag by the recovery process. That is, by the restoration process in S4, the value of the ball dispensing state flag is set to the value before the power outage, and the ball dispensing state before the power outage is restored.

The above-mentioned backup data also includes data on the number of consecutive games after the judgment and the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment, which will be described later, and these data on the number of consecutive games after the judgment and the remaining number of variable displays after the judgment are also stored in S4. The data is restored to the data at the time of power outage through the restoration process.

In this way, the value of the ball release state flag is restored to the value before the power outage by the restoration process in step S4, and the data of the number of successive hits after determination and the number of variable display remaining times after determination are restored. Even if a power outage occurs in the first ball dispensing state or the second ball dispensing state where the ball dispensing speed is being adjusted, the adjustment of the ball dispensing speed will not end due to the power outage and will continue after the power outage is restored. will also be continued.

On the other hand, if the recovery condition is not met in step S3, the initialization process in step S6a is executed, and initial settings (including initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive games) at power-on, etc. are executed. Later, the ball output state flag is set to "0", which is a value corresponding to the low ball output state, which is the initial value when the power is turned on. In this way, when the power is turned on when the power failure recovery conditions are not met (when power supply starts other than power failure recovery), "0", which is the value corresponding to the low ball output state, is set to the ball output state flag. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the ball dispensing speed from being adjusted inappropriately when the power is turned on.

Next, based on FIG. 14-12, the game control timer interrupt processing of the feature section 162SG will be explained. The game control timer interrupt process of this feature section 162SG executes each process of steps S21 to S27 in the same way as the game control timer interrupt process of FIG. 5 in the basic configuration, but in addition to these processes, the basic configuration The difference is that the power cut-off process in step S19, which was omitted in , and the ball-out state determination process, which is a feature of the game control timer interrupt process of the feature section 162SG, are included.

In the power-off process in step S19, it is detected whether a power-off signal is output from the power supply board 17 (whether it is in an on state). The power-off signal is a signal output when, for example, a power monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the supplied power. When it is detected that a power-off signal has been output, as described above, the pachinko game machine 162SG001 includes the above-mentioned ball dispensing state flag, etc., which is necessary to restore the state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 to the state at the time of the power outage. Each game data is stored as backup data in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. Note that if the output of the power-off signal is not detected, the power-off process is ended. After executing the ball release state determination process in step S20, each process in steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball release state determination process in step S20 of the feature section 162SG will be explained using FIG. 14-13(a). FIG. 14-13(a) is a flow diagram showing an example of the processing contents of the ball release state determination process in step S20.

In the ball output state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether the value of the ball output state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball output state is a low ball output state or the first high ball output state. It is determined whether the state is the state or the second high ball state (step 162SGS01).

If the value of the ball release status flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), the number of consecutive games stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of the RAM 102 is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5". It is determined whether there is one (step 162SGS02). If the first determination number is not "5" or more, that is, if the player is not in a consecutive game state, or even if he is in a consecutive game state, the number of consecutive games is less than 5 (step 162 SGS02; N), The ball release state determination process ends. On the other hand, if the number of consecutive games is equal to or greater than the first judgment number of "5" (step 162 SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether the number of consecutive games is equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10". It is determined (step 162SGS03).

If the number of consecutive hits is not equal to or greater than the second determination number of "10" (step 162SGS03;N), that is, when the number of consecutive hits reaches the first determination number of "5", the first ball-out state is reached. It is determined that the ball release state flag is set to "1" corresponding to the first ball release state (step 162SGS06), and the first stage adjustment is started as shown in FIG. 14-13(b) (step 162SGS07). ). In addition, the number of consecutive wins is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, so the fifth jackpot of the number of consecutive wins is a jackpot for which the jackpot period extension adjustment of the first stage is not executed, and the first stage of the jackpot is The jackpot period extension adjustment is performed for the 6th to 10th jackpots in a row.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-21, the jackpot period extension adjustment is performed during the fanfare performance period at the start of the jackpot state, which is the period in which the special variable winning ball device 7 constituting the big winning opening is not released, and at the end of the round game. The interval period from 1 to the start of the next round game, and the ending performance period at the end of the jackpot state are extended from the low ball state where the ball state flag is set to 0, so that the same number of game balls can be played. By extending the period of the jackpot game in which the balls are paid out, the number of game balls paid out in a unit time is reduced.

As shown in Figure 14-21, the extension length of the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period is longer than the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is set to "1". The second high ball output state where the ball state flag is set to "2" is set longer, and the jackpot period extension adjustment for the first high ball output state where the ball state flag is set to "1" is , the jackpot period extension adjustment in the first stage where the extension length is relatively short, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the second high ball output state where "2" is set in the ball output state flag, the extension length is relatively short. This is a long second stage jackpot period extension adjustment.

Then, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 starts to light up to notify that the high ball state has been reached (step 162SGS08), and the number of variable display times after the high ball state is determined is a predetermined number of times. In addition to setting the number of variable display remaining after judgment (100) to specify the remaining number of times until reaching 100, the number of consecutive jackpots after judgment which is the number of successive jackpots that have occurred since the high ball state was determined. After setting the initial value "0" to the number of times (step 162SGS09), the process advances to step 162SGS17. In addition, although this feature section 162SG exemplifies a form in which the predetermined number of times is 100, the present invention is not limited to this, and these numbers may vary depending on specifications such as jackpot probability and jackpot continuation rate. You may change it as appropriate.

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive hits is equal to or greater than the second determination number of "10" (step 162SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive hits reaches the second determination number of "10", the second number of balls put out is It was determined that the state was reached, and the ball dispensing state flag was set to "2" corresponding to the second ball dispensing state (step 162SGS04), and the second stage adjustment was started as shown in FIG. 14-13(b). After that (step 162SGS05), the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. Incidentally, since the number of successive wins is updated in the jackpot termination process as described later, the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment will be executed for the jackpot after the 11th successive win number.

In addition, if the value of the ball release state flag is not "0" (step 162 SGS01; N), whether or not the number of consecutive games after the determination is 10 or more, which is the number of times for ending the adjustment, In other words, it is determined whether the number of consecutive games after the determination has reached 10, which is the number of times of end determination (step 162SGS10). In addition, although this feature section 162SG exemplifies a form in which the number of times the end determination is made is 10, the present invention is not limited to this, and these numbers may vary depending on specifications such as jackpot probability and jackpot continuation rate. It may be changed as appropriate.

If the number of consecutive hits after determination is 10 or more, which is the number of times of end determination (step 162 SGS10; N), that is, after the number of consecutive hits is 5 or more and it is determined that the high ball state is occurring, the consecutive winning state is When the number of successive game jackpots that have occurred without ending reaches 10, it is determined whether the gaming state is in a low base state, that is, whether the consecutive game state has ended or not. (Step 162SGS11) If the gaming state is the low base state (Step 162SGS11; Y), the process advances to Step 162SGS13. Note that the number of consecutive games is reset when the consecutive games state ends and the low base state is reached.

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive games after the determination is not 10 or more, which is the number of times of end determination (Step 162SGS10; N), or if the number of consecutive games after determination is 10 or more, which is the number of times of end determination (Step 162SGS10; Y) If the gaming state is not the low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether the remaining number of variable display after determination set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

If the remaining number of variable displays after determination is not "0" (step 162SGS12; N), that is, after the number of consecutive games is 5 or more and it is determined that the high ball payout state is reached, the variable display will be displayed 100 times, which is the predetermined number of times. If not executed, the ball release state determination process is ended.

If the remaining number of variable displays after determination is "0" (step 162SGS12; Y), that is, if the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, since it was determined that the high ball payout state is in effect, Proceed to step 162 SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, by updating the ball output status flag to "0", after completing the above-mentioned first stage or second stage adjustment (step 162SGS14), lighting of the high ball output status notification LED 162SG071 is terminated. After completing the notification that the adjustment is being carried out in the high ball payout state (step 162SGS15), reset the number of variable display remaining after determination and the number of successive games after determination (step 162SGS16), and proceed to step 162SGS17. .

In step 162SGS17, after executing the transmission setting of the ball dispensing state designation command corresponding to the value of the ball dispensing state flag set in step 162SGS04, step 162SGS06, or step 162SGS13, the ball dispensing state is determined. Finish the process. The ball release state designation command set for transmission in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG.

As described above, by executing the ball dispensing state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13(a), as shown in FIG. 14-13(b), the value of the dispensing ball state flag changes to the value at the start of power supply. Similarly, if it is "0", neither the variable display time extension adjustment that extends the variable display time nor the jackpot period extension adjustment that extends the period of the jackpot game, but the first When the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "1" due to the determination of a high ball output state, the variable display time of the first stage is extended to the length of the first stage. Both the adjustment and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment in which the period of the jackpot game is extended to the length of the first stage are executed. Furthermore, if the value of the ball release state flag is updated to "2" due to the second high ball release state being determined in the ball release state determination process, the variable display time is longer than the first stage. Both the second stage variable display time extension adjustment, in which the length of the jackpot game is extended to the stage length, and the second stage jackpot period extension adjustment, in which the period of the jackpot game is extended to the second stage length, which is longer than the first stage. The execution of these adjustments is notified by lighting of the high ball state notification LED 162SG071.

Furthermore, if the value of the ball-out state flag is "1" or "2" and the number of consecutive games after judgment reaches the end judgment number, or if the remaining number of variable display after judgment becomes 0 (ball-out state flag If the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of is set to "1" or "2"), the value of the ball release status flag is updated to "0" and the variable display time extension adjustment and jackpot period Extension adjustment is completed.

In addition, this feature section 162SG exemplifies a mode in which the high ball output status notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball output status flag is updated from "0" to "1", but the present invention is not limited to this. Although not limited to this, the high ball output status notification LED 162SG071 does not light up from the timing when the value of the ball output status flag is updated from "0" to "1" during normal gaming, and the high ball output status notification LED 162SG071 If a power outage occurs while the value is set to "1" or "2", the light may be turned on only for a certain period of time after the power outage is restored.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the value of the ball release state flag is "1" or "2", both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed. The invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball release state flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball release state flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed, and the value of the ball release state flag is "2". In some cases, both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be performed.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-13(a), the CPU 103 transmits a ball release state designation command to the production control board 12 only when the value of the ball release state flag changes. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the CPU 103 always sends the ball dispensing state designation command to the production control board 12 every time the ball dispensing state determination process is executed or every time the variable display is executed. It may also be sent to. Furthermore, in the feature section 162SG, although a form is illustrated in which a ball release state designation command is provided as part of the production control command, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of these ball release state designation commands, the present invention is not limited to this. , a game state designation command corresponding to each ball output state (low ball output state, first high ball output state, second high ball output state) may be provided.

Next, the starting prize winning determination process of the main feature section 162SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIG. 14-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 162 SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 162SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 162 SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 162SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 162SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 162SGS101 (step 162SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 162SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (Step 162SGS104; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 162SGS105). For example, the CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 162SGS105 (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 162SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 162SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 162SGS103 and step 162SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (step 162 SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 162SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the head of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value (step 162SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 162SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 162SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 162SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 162SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value is performed (step 162SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the performance control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 162SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 162SGS112). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for (step 162 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS115), and then the process of step 162SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 162SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even when both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B detect valid starting winnings of game balls at the same time, processing based on detection of both effective starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 14-15(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 162SGS112 of FIG. 14-14 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 162SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6, FIGS. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 14-17) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (first starting winning hole or second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 162 SGS 112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 14-15(A), the gaming control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the gaming control flag setting section 162SG152, etc. The current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is identified by checking or the like (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 162SGS121, display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 14-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 14-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, the individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 162 SGS 122 are set, and the CPU 103 combines the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 162SGS123; N), display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-4 is Select and set (step 162SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 14-14 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 162SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 162SGS125; Y), the variable display result will be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 162SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 162SGS127), and proceed to step 162SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 162SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 162SGS128). 162SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), determine the variation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 162SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 162SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C used when the number of pending memories is 4 is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 14-7, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and In the fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C, values exceeding 0 to A within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 small determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 162SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach will always be made between non-reach and super reach even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 162SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 14-15 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 162 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 162SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 162SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS135), and step Proceed to 162SGS138.

Further, if the determined jackpot type is not a non-probability variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; Y), select and set jackpot variation pattern determination table B as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 162SGS136), proceed to step 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not Probable Variable Jackpot A or Probable Variable Jackpot B (Step 162SGS134b; N), that is, if the determined jackpot type is Probable Variable Jackpot C, select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table. (Step 162SGS137) and proceeds to Step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 162SGS127, step 162SGS130, step 162SGS131, step 162SGS135, step 162SGS136, and step 162SGS137, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the numerical data indicating the random number MR3, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 162SGS138). In this feature section 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-15(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a fluctuation category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 162SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 162SGS132), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIGS. 14-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 14-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 162SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 162SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the reservation stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B corresponding to the reservation number "1" Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out as data (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 162 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by updating the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section 162SG151B is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151B are The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 162SGS144), the process moves to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 162SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether the read value is "0" or not. Bye. In this way, the process of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 162SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" at step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A corresponding to the reservation number "1" Numerical data indicating random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out as data (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 162 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section 162SG151A is updated. Specifically, the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit 162SG151A are The pending data shown is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 162SGS148), the process moves to step 162SGS149.

In step 162SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 14-4 is used as a table used to determine whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big hit" or a "miss". Select and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 162 SGS 150a). In this step 162SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (variable probability state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is set to a high probability state (variable probability state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the display result determination table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high probability, low probability), so In the processing of the 162SGS 150a, the special figure display result is determined by using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display of a special figure game or the like is started is a high accuracy state or not. When the gaming state is in a high probability state, it is determined (determined) that it is a "jackpot" with a higher probability than in the case where it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 162SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the gaming control flag setting section 162SG152 (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-5(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C" matches, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used (step 162 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 162SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 162SG155 (step 162SGS155), the determined jackpot type remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set as "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set as "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, where the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-4 is selected and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "small hit", and the special figure It is determined whether or not the display result is a "small win" (step 162SGS150c). In addition, in step 162SGS150c, when the fluctuating special figure is the first special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is to be a "small hit" using the judgment value corresponding to the first special figure. If the variable special figure is the second special figure, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result should be a "small hit" using the determination value corresponding to the second special figure.

When it is determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting section 162SG152 is turned on (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 162SGS150c that the special figure display result is a "small win" (step 162SGS150c; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS156.

In step 162SGS156, the predetermined result of whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on), and whether to control to the small winning gaming state (whether the small winning flag is turned on or not). A confirmed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not the jackpot is played or not, and further, the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step 162SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 162SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, in response to the pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "small win", a special symbol indicating the symbol "2", which is a small prize symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 162SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the special map game using the first special map is "0" at step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 162SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 14-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 14-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is specified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the specified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" (step 162 SGS163), and if it is not "probable variable jackpot C", that is, "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "non-probable variable jackpot B", or "non-probable variable jackpot C". If it is either "probable variable jackpot" (step 162SGS163; N), jackpot variation pattern determination table A or jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified jackpot type. Specifically, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for jackpot, and determine whether the specified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" or "probable variable jackpot B". ”, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, when the identified jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" (step 162SGS163; Y), a special winning variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS165).

In the determination at step 162SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 162SGS161; N), it is further determined whether the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166). If the small hit flag is turned on (step 162SGS166; Y), the special win variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), by determining whether or not the time-saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section 162SG152, the game state is changed to a variable probability state or a time-saving state. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed in the state (step 162 SGS168). Then, if the time saving flag is turned on (step 162SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 162SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not turned on (step 162SGS168; N), for example, the pending storage number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section 162SG154 is stored. By reading the value, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special figure is specified, and it is determined whether the specified number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 162SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 162SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of multiple types. and set (step 162SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 162SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. The error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the error pattern (step 162SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 162SGS164, step 162SGS165, step 162SGS167, step 162SGS169, step 162SGS171, step 162SGS173, and step 162SGS174, the random number MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern stored in a random number buffer for fluctuation, etc. Based on the numerical data indicating is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 162SGS175). In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern determined in this case is the same fluctuation pattern, if the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "1", the fluctuation pattern determined in this case is the first one corresponding to the first high ball output state. A variation pattern of the variable display time that has been adjusted to be extended by one stage will be determined, and if the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "2", it corresponds to the second high ball output state. A variation pattern of the variable display time that has undergone the second stage extension adjustment is determined.

That is, in step 162SGS175, a variation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball release state flag.

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the variation pattern in the process of step 162SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 162SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 162SGS175, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 162SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 162SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 162SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting section 162SG155. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 162SGS177, a special symbol variable display time, which is a variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the value of the ball release state flag, is set for the variation pattern determined in step 162SGS175 (step 162SGS178). The special symbol variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the period from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. The required time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 162SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162SGS177, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The specification command, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first pending memory number notification command, or the second pending memory number notification command are transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variation start command, second variation start command, and variation pattern specification command are sent. , the gaming state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command.

FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S113 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 162SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 162SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and if the jackpot flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), the small hit flag is also turned on. It is determined whether there is one (step 162SGS183).

If the small hit flag is in the on state, settings are made to the performance control board 12 to transmit a winning start 5 designation command corresponding to the small win (step 162SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small winning display time is set in the small winning display time timer (step 162SGS190b). Further, the number of openings (for example, two times) is set in the number of openings counter of the big winning opening (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8" (step 162SGS190d), which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-process (step S118), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS182; Y) and the probability variable flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time saving flag and turns them off (step 162SGS182; Y). 162SGS184), hit start 1 specified command (probable variable jackpot A), hit start 2 specified command (probable variable jackpot B), hit start 3 specified command (probable variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. ), settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 162 SGS 185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 162SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time corresponding to the execution period of a fanfare performance to notify the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162 SGS 187). At this time, as the jackpot display time set in the jackpot display time timer, the jackpot display time is set according to the ball release state flag.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-21, if the value of the ball output status flag is "0", the 30000 milliseconds corresponding to the non-extended fanfare performance period corresponding to the low ball output status is 30000 milliseconds. Milliseconds are set as the jackpot display time.

If the value of the ball release state flag is "1", 40,000 milliseconds corresponding to 40,000 milliseconds, which is the fanfare performance period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball release state, is set as the jackpot display time, If the value of the ball output state flag is "2", 60,000 milliseconds corresponding to 60,000 milliseconds, which is the fanfare performance period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set as the jackpot display time. .

Then, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. After that (step 162SGS188), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), in step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. Although not particularly illustrated in this feature section 162SG, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game that ended in the jackpot game end process is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B, the CPU 103 sets the probability variable flag and the time saving flag. Both are turned on (the gaming state is controlled to a high-accuracy, high-base state), and the value of the time saving number counter is set to "0", and in the jackpot game termination process, the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is a probability-variable jackpot C. If there is, the probability change flag is turned on (the gaming state is controlled to a high probability low base state) and the value of the time saving number counter is set to "0". Then, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game that has ended in the jackpot game end process is a non-probable variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time saving flag and sets the value of the time saving number counter to "100". ing. In some cases, the process proceeds to step 162SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 162 SGS190; N), that is, if the number of time saving times remains and the high base state is reached, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 162SGS190; N). 162SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 162SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 162SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the variable probability flag or the time-saving flag is After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, low probability low base) (step 162SGS195), the process advances to step 162SGS196. Incidentally, with the execution of step 162SGS195, the number of consecutive games is also reset.

Then, a post-judgment variable display remaining count update process is executed (step 162SGS196). In this post-judgment variable display remaining number update process, it is determined whether the post-judgment variable display remaining number is "0" or not, and if it is not "0" (if there is a remaining number), the remaining number is set to 1. The subtractive update is performed, and if it is "0", the post-determination variable display remaining number update process is ended.

Next, in step 162SGS197, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 14-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is counting (step 162SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 162SGS201; N), set the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the execution period of the ending performance that displays the jackpot end display on the image display device 5 as the jackpot end display time. (Step 162SGS202), and the process ends.

At this time, as the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer, the jackpot end display time is set according to the ball release state flag. Specifically, as shown in Figure 14-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the timer corresponding to 60,000 milliseconds, which is the non-extended ending effect period corresponding to the low ball output state, is activated. The value is set. In addition, if the value of the ball release state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70,000 milliseconds, which is the ending effect period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball release state, is set, and the ball release state is If the value of the flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 90000 milliseconds, which is the ending performance period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball payout state, is set.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 162SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 162SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether the stored jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

If the stored jackpot type is probability variable jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 162SGS210), and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, if the stored jackpot type is not probability variable jackpot C, that is, if the jackpot type is probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B (step 162SGS206; N), the probability variation flag is turned on (step 162SGS207), After turning on the time saving flag (step 162SGS208) and setting the time saving number counter to "0" (step 162SGS209), the process advances to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), step 162SGS211 and step 162SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 162SGS214). Then, settings are made to transmit a gaming state designation command for notifying the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 162SGS215).

Then, the process of updating the number of consecutive games and the number of consecutive games after determination is executed (step 162SGS216). In this update process, specifically, whether the completed jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in a low base state as described above or a consecutive jackpot that occurred in a high base state, for example, It is identified from the value of the state flag before jackpot start (“0” if it is a low base, “1” if it is a high base) corresponding to the state before the occurrence of the jackpot, and if it is the first jackpot, it is determined by the number of consecutive wins Set "1". On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot in consecutive games, since the number of consecutive games is already a value other than "0", 1 is added to the number of consecutive games to be updated. In addition, in the case of a jackpot in consecutive games, if an initial value is set in the number of consecutive games after determination, 1 is added to and updated to the number of consecutive games after determination.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 162SGS217).

Although not particularly illustrated in this feature section 162SG, if the number of round executions has not reached the set upper limit number in the jackpot release post-processing (step S116), the CPU 103 executes Set the interval period timer. Specifically, as shown in Figure 14-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the timer value corresponding to 5000 milliseconds, which is the non-extended interval period corresponding to the low ball output state. Set. Further, if the value of the ball output state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the first stage extension corresponding to the first high ball output state, is set. Further, if the value of the ball output state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7000 milliseconds, which is the interval period of the second stage extension corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

After setting these timer values to the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer every time the jackpot release post-processing is executed. While controlling the opening of the winning opening, the value of the special figure process is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process, that is, a new round game is started.

In this way, in this feature section 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-20, during the period from when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed until the end of the jackpot game based on the derived display of the jackpot symbol, the ball release state flag is set. Regardless of the value, the round game continues until a certain opening period (for example, 29 seconds) passes or a certain number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the grand prize opening, so the ball output status flag The number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change depending on the value. On the other hand, as shown in Figures 14-20 and 14-21, the game ball cannot enter the grand prize opening because the grand prize opening is closed, that is, the fanfare production in which it is impossible to win the prize ball. The period, interval period, and ending presentation period become longer as the value of the ball release state flag changes from 0 to 1 to 2.

For this reason, the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change according to the value of the ball dispensing status flag, which prevents the number of prize balls that the player can acquire from decreasing, while also preventing the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game from decreasing. By changing (lengthening) the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period, which are the periods during which winnings cannot be won in the winning slot, depending on the value of the ball dispensing status flag, the number of prize balls paid out per unit time can be increased. It is possible to suppress it.

Next, processing that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained.

FIG. 14-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 14-22, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 162SGS221).

If there is a received command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether the received command is the first starting opening winning designation command. (Step 162 SGS222). When it is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the process of step 162SGS223, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the production control timer setting section 162SG192. Bye.

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 162SGS222 (step 162SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 162SGS224). Then, when it is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), a second pending storage number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the process of step 162SGS225, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 162SGS224 (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 162SGS226 (step 162SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 162SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 162SGS227 (step 162SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS228). When the command is the first pending storage number notification command (Step 162SGS228; Y), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (Step 162SGS229). .

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 162SGS228 (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 162SGS230). If it is the second pending storage number notification command (Step 162SGS230; Y), the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the time measurement operation by the command reception control timer (Step 162SGS231). .

After executing either of the processes in step 162SGS229 or step 162SGS231, the display undetermined flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode is undetermined (display undetermined flag is turned on), and if there is an unreceived command, the production restriction flag is set to "1" (the display restriction flag is turned on) (step 162SGS232).

If the received command at step 162SGS226 is a symbol designation command (step 162SGS226; Y), or if the received command at step 162SGS227 is a variable category command (step 162SGS227; Y), or at step 162SGS223, step 162SGS225, step 162SGS232 After executing any of the processes, the received command is stored at the beginning of the free space in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (not shown) (step 162SGS233), and the process returns to step 162SGS221.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to be able to sequentially store the production control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 162SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 162SGS230 (step 162SGS230; N), settings corresponding to other received commands are performed (step 162SGS234), and then the process returns to step 162SGS221. For example, when the received command is a ball dispensing state designation command, the production control CPU 120 specifies the ball dispensing state from the ball dispensing state designation command in the process of step 162SGS234, and also specifies the ball dispensing state according to the identified ball dispensing state. What is necessary is to perform processing such as turning on the flag. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 can identify the ball release state by referring to the flag.

Note that if there is no received command in the command reception buffer in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether the first pending storage number notification waiting time or the second pending storage number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS221;N). 162SGS237). If the first pending memory number notification waiting time or the second pending memory number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 162SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated, and the first pending memory number notification waiting time or the second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed. If the several notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS237; Y), set the display undetermined flag of the corresponding storage incomplete entry to the production restriction flag to "1" (turn the display undetermined flag on), Ends command analysis processing.

FIG. 14-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 9 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 14-23, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS241), and determines whether there is a new storage of the starting winning command. is determined based on whether there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 162SGS242a; N), the process advances to step 162SGS252, and if there is an entry whose display undetermined flag is on (step 162SGS242a; Y), further determination is made. It is determined whether the remaining number of times of post-variable display is less than or equal to the limited number of times of pre-reading (step 162SGS242b). If the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the prefetch limit (step 162SGS242b; Y), the process advances to step 162SGS250, and as described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set to the pending display flag. Set.

In addition, if the remaining number of variable displays after determination is greater than the prefetch limit number (step 162SGS242b; N), check whether the performance restriction flag of the entry is in the on state (whether it is set to "1" or not) (Step 162SGS242c). If the production restriction flag is in the ON state (step 162SGS242c; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS250, and as described later, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is set in the pending display flag.

On the other hand, if the performance restriction flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), check whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a probability-variable jackpot. It is determined whether it is a symbol designation command indicating a C or a small hit (step 162SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small win (step 162SGS243a; Y), by proceeding to step 162SGS250, "0" corresponding to the normal display mode is , is set in the pending display flag. In other words, the pre-read preview performance is not executed for the pending memory that will result in a probability variable jackpot C or a small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, check whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, the symbol designation command is a command indicating a loss. It is determined whether or not (step 162SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (any of the variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, or non-probable variable jackpot) (step 162SGS243b; N), the entry The jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command (step 162SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting section 162SG193, and the jackpot type specified in step 162SGS244, the pre-read at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is performed. By referring to the preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 162SGS245).

In step 162SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-24(A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-24(A), the presence or absence of a pre-read preview effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are varied depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 162SGS244. .

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area 5U. When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-read preview effect is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display will be displayed in a white star shape (☆) in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display. Displayed in area 5U.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than guaranteed variable jackpot C, the pre-read preview effect will not be determined to be non-executable, and the pre-read preview effect will always be decided to be executed and the display pattern (notice type) Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β (notice type) is determined.

In addition, as shown in Figure 14-24 (A), when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", the proportion of display patterns β determined as the display pattern (notice type) is determined by the display pattern α. The percentage is set higher than the On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" or "non-probable variable jackpot", the proportion at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the proportion at which display pattern α is determined. It is set low.

With these settings, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the jackpot type will be lower than the case where the display pattern α is displayed. The percentage of probability-variable jackpots A increases, and the player's expectations for the probability-variable jackpot A can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, if the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than the probability-variable jackpot C, the pending memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) by always deciding to execute the pre-read preview performance. Either the display pattern α or the display pattern β that is displayed in a white star shape (☆) is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is likely to be a variable jackpot C. Even if it is a "jackpot" other than the above, a case may be provided in which it is determined not to perform the pre-read preview effect, as in the case where the variable display result is a "miss".

In addition, in step 162SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of the entry whose display undetermined flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 162SGS243b; Y), display undetermined The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry whose flag is on is identified (step 162SGS247). Specifically, if the fluctuation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified that it is a category with a "non-reach" fluctuation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is determined that it is a category of a "super reach" fluctuation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 162SGS247, By referring to the missed advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the advance notice effect (step 162SGS248).

In step 162SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 14-24(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-24(B), the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect are determined depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 162SGS247. It's different.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is a white rectangle (◇) in a specific manner in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area. 5U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the pending memory display is a specific form of white star (☆) in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area 5D. It is displayed in the memory display area 5U. Incidentally, when it is determined that the prefetch preview performance is not executed, the pending memory display is displayed in the first pending memory display area 5D or the second pending memory display area 5U in a round shape (◯) which is the normal mode.

As shown in Figure 14-24(B), if the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other", the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the variation pattern is "other". The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than ``no preview effect'') is set higher than when the is ``non-reach''. Also, if the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Super Reach", than when the variable display result is "Off" and the variation pattern category is "Other", The rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed (the rate determined to be other than "no preview effect") is set high.

When the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the variable category is "other", it is more important than if the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is also set high. Furthermore, when the category of the variation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the category of the variation pattern is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss" and it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, if the category of the variable pattern is "other", the category of the variable pattern is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "Super Reach", and the display pattern The rate at which β is determined is set high.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of pre-read preview performances determined to be non-executable regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". is set to the highest value, and the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest value.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14-24 (A), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be non-executable (no preview effect), and the pre-read preview effect is not determined to be executed (no preview effect). The rate at which the preview performance is decided to be executed and the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined is that the display pattern α or the display pattern β in any variable pattern category is determined when the variable display result is “miss”. The percentage is set higher than the

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss (non-reach)," "miss (super reach)," or "miss (other)," when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the display pattern α The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Jackpot (Probability Variable A)", when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the proportion at which the display pattern β is determined is the proportion at which the display pattern α is determined. is set higher than.

Due to such settings, if display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of advance notice effect, if display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed) There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" than the above, and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probable variable jackpot A". Since the percentage becomes higher, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players.

After executing step 162SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance has been determined in step 162SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 162SGS249).

After executing step 162SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 162SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 162SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern α in which the pending memory display is indicated by "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is the display pattern β in which the pending storage display is indicated by "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

In addition, in step 162SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 162SGS249; N), after setting the pending display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 162SGS250) and proceeds to step 162SGS251.

In addition, after executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the display undetermined flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). Thereafter, the pending display is updated based on the stored contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru. In addition, even when the variable display is executed and the storage contents of the starting prize winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, the storage contents of the starting prize winning receiving command buffer 162SG194A after the shift are changed according to the stored contents of the starting prize winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (see FIG. 14-25). As shown in A), the hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-25(B), if the number of first special symbol pending memories is one, one pending memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this pending memory display, when the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display format is "○" as shown in Figure 14-25 (B). If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed as "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the display mode. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is two, two pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 5D. In addition, if the number of first special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the first pending storage display area 5D.

Further, if the second special figure pending storage number is one, one pending storage display is displayed. As with the case of the first special figure, if the flag value of the pending display flag corresponding to the pending memory is "0", the display mode of this pending memory display is "○". If the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it will be displayed in the display format of "◇", and if the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", it will be displayed as "☆". It is displayed in the following manner. Furthermore, if the second special figure pending memory number is two, for example, as shown in Figure 14-25 (B), two pending memory displays will be displayed, and each pending memory display will correspond to the corresponding pending memory. As a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of , for example, the pending memory display of 1 is a display mode of "○", the pending memory display of 1 is a display mode of "☆", and the second pending memory display is displayed. Displayed in area 5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is three, three pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 5U. In addition, if the number of second special figure pending memories is four, four pending memory displays are displayed, and each pending memory display is in a mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag of the corresponding pending memory. is displayed in the second pending storage display area 5U.

Then, each time the variable display is executed, as the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), the reserved memory display is also shifted in a predetermined shift direction (this characteristic part 162SG, it shifts toward the center of the screen).

In other words, if the pending memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process to be described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the pending memory of the starting winning command buffer 162SG194A is shifted, then when starting winning after the shift Based on the pending memory of the reception command buffer 162SG194A, the pending memory displays in the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U are also shifted and displayed, and a new pending memory is created due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the pending memory is determined and set in the pending display flag, and the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory are displayed in a display mode according to the flag value set in the pending display flag. It comes to be displayed in the memory display area 5U.

Note that although this characteristic section 162SG exemplifies a form in which the process of step 162SGS252 is executed in the prefetch notice setting process, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first reservation storage display areas 5D The process for updating the hold display in the second hold storage display area 5U may be executed separately as a process different from the prefetch notice setting process (for example, hold display update process).

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, on the condition that there is a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in step 162SGS242, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory for the starting winning. Due to the simultaneous occurrence of a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole, a new command at the time of starting winning is stored in both the first special drawing and the second special drawing in step 162SGS242. If it is determined that there is, that is, if an entry whose display undetermined flag is on exists in both the first special figure reservation memory and the second special figure reservation memory, both entries are read in advance and announced. This is used to determine whether or not to perform the performance. Both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting prize winning in the first special drawing was newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing were newly stored are used to determine the execution and non-execution of the pre-announcement performance. If it is determined, if there is no entry for the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-read preview effect, the pending display of the first special figure's pending memory and the pending display of the second special figure will be displayed. Prefetch preview effects may be executed simultaneously on both displays.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when a starting prize in the first starting winning hole and a starting winning in the second starting winning hole occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special drawing is Both the newly stored pending memory and the newly stored pending memory in which the command at the time of starting winning in the second special drawing are newly stored are subject to the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance. In such a case, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, and the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the second special figure. It is also possible to decide to execute only one of them.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or non-execute the pre-read preview performance in the suspended memory in the first special figure is suspended in the second special figure. This is done with priority over the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure When it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the figure, it is sufficient to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview effect in the pending memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, if the gaming state is a time saving state where high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), execution or non-execution of the pre-read notice performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure This determination is given priority over the determination of execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special figure, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure If it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the figure, it is only necessary to decide whether to execute or not to perform the pre-read preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 14-26 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the on state (step 162SGS271; Y), the buffer number of the first special symbol pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A is set to "1-0" to "1-4". Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 162SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 162SG194A are stored for each buffer number. Shift to the upper position (step 162SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing Step 162SGS272 or Step 162SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (Step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols will be "334", "778", etc., which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbol will be "334", "778", etc., which is the same chance as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol. Decide on a combination of symbols other than the above-mentioned chance (missing symbols), and if the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a combination of decorative symbols such as "121" or "464" that is out of reach (missing symbols). ) to determine.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 14-27, and determines whether or not to execute the preview performance in the variable display (step 162SGS277). In addition, in this feature section 162SG, in the preview performance determination process, a mode is exemplified in which execution of any one of the four preview performances A to D, as described later, can be determined, but this invention is not limited to this, and the number of executable preview performances may be three or less or five or more.

In the preview performance determination process of the feature section 162SG, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the ball release state and sets a preview performance type determination table corresponding to the identified ball release state (step 162SGS290). Note that the ball dispensing state may be specified, for example, from the value of a flag that is turned on when the ball dispensing state designation command is received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-28, when the production control CPU 120 specifies the ball output state as a low ball output state, it selects the preview performance type determination table A and sets the ball output state to the first high. If the ball-out state is specified, table B for determining the type of preview performance is selected, and if the ball-out state is specified as the second high ball-out state, table C for determining the preview performance type may be selected.

Moreover, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 162SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area.

Then, a random number for determining a preview performance is extracted, and the table for determining the type of preview performance set in step 162SG290 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the type of preview performance if executed (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-28, when the ball output state is a low ball output state, using table A for determining the type of advance notice effect, if the variable display result is out of reach, 85 % determines whether to execute the preview effect, 10% determines the execution of the preview effect A, 5% determines the execution of the preview effect B, and 0% determines the execution of the preview effect C. The execution is decided, and the execution of the preview effect D is decided at a rate of 0%. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, 50% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect A, and 30% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect B. The execution of the preview performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the preview performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot excluding jackpot C, it is decided not to execute the preview effect at a rate of 10%, it is decided to execute the preview effect A at a rate of 25%, and the preview effect is decided at a rate of 65%. B is determined to be executed, advance notice performance C is determined to be executed at a rate of 0%, and advance notice performance D is determined to be executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, using the table B for determining the type of advance notice effect, if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. Decide to execute preview effect A at a rate of 10%, decide to execute preview effect B at a rate of 5%, decide to execute preview effect C at a rate of 0%, and decide to execute preview effect C at a rate of 0%. The execution of preview performance D is decided. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, 50% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect A, and 25% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect B. The execution of the preview performance C is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the preview performance D is determined at a rate of 0%. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot excluding jackpot C, it is decided not to execute the preview effect at a rate of 10%, it is decided to execute the preview effect A at a rate of 25%, and the preview effect is decided at a rate of 50%. B is determined to be executed, advance notice effect C is decided to be executed at a rate of 15%, and advance notice effect D is decided to be executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the ball output state is the second high ball output state, using table C for determining the type of advance notice effect, if the variable display result is out of reach, the advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 85%. At a rate of 8%, it is decided to execute preview effect A, at a rate of 4% it is decided to execute preview effect B, at a rate of 3% it is decided to execute preview effect C, and at a rate of 0%. The execution of preview performance D is decided. If the variable display result is out of super reach, 20% of the time it is decided not to execute the preview effect, 45% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect A, and 20% of the time it is decided to execute the preview effect B. The execution of the preview effect C is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the preview effect D is determined at a rate of 0%. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot excluding jackpot C, it is decided not to execute the preview effect at a rate of 10%, it is decided to execute the preview effect A at a rate of 15%, and the preview effect is decided at a rate of 45%. B is determined to be executed, advance notice effect C is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and advance notice effect D is decided to be executed at a rate of 10%.

In other words, among the preview performances in this feature section 162SG, the preview performance D is set to have the highest jackpot expectation level (the percentage of variable display results that are jackpots), and the preview performance C has a higher jackpot expectation level than the preview performance D. The forecast performance B has a lower jackpot expectation level than the preview performance C, and the preview performance A has a lower jackpot expectation level than the preview performance B. When the preview performance is not executed, the jackpot expectation level is set lower than when any preview performance is executed (Jackpot expectation level: Preview performance D > Preview performance C > Preview performance B > Preview performance A> Preview performance not performed).

Also, looking at the number of preview performances that can be executed in each ball output state, there are two preview performances that can be executed in the low ball output state, preview performance A and preview performance B, and can be executed in the first high ball output state. There are three preview performances: Preview Production A, Preview Production B, and Preview Production C. Preview productions that can be executed in the second high ball state are Preview Production A, Preview Production B, Preview Production C, and Preview Production D. There are 4 pieces. In other words, in this feature section 162SG, the number of advance notice effects that can be executed during the variable display increases by continuing the consecutive winning state after the first hit occurs, so the game may be delayed during the consecutive winning. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to storage.

In particular, in the second high ball state, the preview effect D that confirms that the variable display result will be a jackpot can be executed, so during the variable display in the second high ball state, the preview effect D can be executed. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game will be played, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 14-27, after executing step 162SGS292, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the preview performance (step 162SGS293). If execution of the preview performance has not been decided (step 162SGS293; N), the preview performance determination process is ended. Further, if it is decided to execute the preview effect (step 162SGS293; Y), the preview effect type determined in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), and the preview effect execution determination flag is turned on (step 162SGS295). The performance determination process ends.

After executing the preview performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. In other words, it is determined whether one of the "notice presentation A" and "notice presentation B" has been determined in the notice presentation determination process of step 162SGS277.

If the preview performance execution determination flag is in the on state, the process advances to step 162SGS279, sets a value corresponding to the period until the start of the preview performance in the preview performance start wait timer (step 162SGS279), and executes the preview performance. The decision flag is turned off (step 162SGS280) and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, if the preview performance execution determination flag is off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without passing through step 162SGS279 and step 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of these preview performances, in this feature section 162SG, before the timing when the preview performance is started, a performance (not shown) indicating a precursor to the execution of the preview performance is performed, and the precursor is started. Since the timing is set as the start timing of the preview performance, a period shorter than the period until the start of the preview performance is set, and the start timing of these preview performances is determined by the process table of the preview performance that is executed from the start of the preview performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if these precursor performances are not carried out in the preview performance, the preview performance may be started. Since the start timing is the start timing of the preview performance, the period up to the start timing of the preview performance may be set as a timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance.

In step 162SGS281, the production control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state and selects a production control pattern (process table) according to the identified ball release state and the fluctuation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 162SGS282).

In addition, in step 162SGS281, the production control CPU 120 may identify the ball release state by referring to the value of the production ball release state flag set in the process of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis process.

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 162SGS283). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball release state and the variable pattern designation command (step 162SGS284). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 162SGS285). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display production process (step S172) (step 162SGS286).

As described above, by the performance control CPU 120 executing the variable display start setting process, in this feature section 162SG, the ball output state can be set to any of the low ball output state, the first high ball output state, and the second high ball output state. Even in this case, it is possible to perform variable display of decorative symbols in conjunction with the special figure variable display time. In addition, this feature section 162SG exemplifies a form in which the production control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols according to the ball dispensing state based on the value of the production ball dispensing state flag and the fluctuation pattern designation command. However, the present invention is not limited thereto; for example, the CPU 103 may include a variation pattern specification command and a variation pattern determination state specification that specifies in which ball release state the variation pattern specification command is determined. Commands can be sent to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120), and each time the performance control CPU 120 receives these fluctuation pattern designation commands and fluctuation pattern determination state designation commands, it creates a decorative pattern according to the ball appearance state. It may also be possible to perform a variable display of.

FIG. 14-29 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decreases each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer by 1 (step 162SGS301, step 162SGS302, step 162SGS303). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance is set (it has been decided to perform the preview performance) or the flag showing the execution of the preview performance is on (the preview performance is being executed). If yes (step 162SGS304; Y), a preview effect process is executed (step 162SGS305). If both the timer for waiting for the start of the preview performance and the flag during execution of the preview performance are off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS306 without executing the preview performance process of step 162SGS305.

In step 162SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 162SGS308). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-center right decorative symbol (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed from the previous display switching point of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written into a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 162SGS311). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, on the image display device 5, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 162SGS310; N), after executing step 162SGS312, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 162SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the on state (step 162SGS314; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to the value of the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n times out in the process of step 162SGS306, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

In addition, when executing a preview performance with the preview performance start wait timer set, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the preview performance start wait timer in the preview performance processing, and then waits for the start of the preview performance. Determine whether the wait timer has timed out. When the timer for waiting for the start of a preview performance has timed out, that is, when it is time to start the preview performance, the process table for the preview performance corresponding to the type of preview performance that has been decided to be executed is selected, and the process table for the preview performance is selected. Start the timer. That is, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the first process data in the process table for advance notice production. Further, the preview performance processing is ended by turning on the preview performance execution flag.

When the preview performance is executed when the flag indicating that the preview performance is being executed is in the on state, the performance control CPU 120 updates the process timer for the preview performance by decrement, and the process timer for the preview performance times out. Determine whether or not. If the process timer for preview presentation has not timed out, control the presentation device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer being executed, and if the process timer for preview presentation has timed out, , to switch process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 may start the process timer for the next preview performance again and control the performance device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the preview performance process as described above, the preview performance can be executed during variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 162SG described above, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 is exemplified as a mode in which only the light is turned on and off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 The variable display time extension adjustment is being executed because the variable display is being executed, but when the jackpot period extension adjustment is not being executed because the jackpot is not in the state, it lights up in green (first mode) and the high output is displayed. When the jackpot period extension adjustment is executed due to the jackpot state in the ball state, but the variable display time extension adjustment is not executed because the variable display is not executed, it lights up in red (second mode). It may also be possible to check (understand) which adjustment is being executed.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG described above, the consecutive winning state continues and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from 0 → 1 → 2 (the ball output state changes from the low ball output state to the first high ball output state). The ball output per unit time can be increased by lengthening the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period of the jackpot game during the consecutive game state (depending on the state of the ball and changing to the second highest ball output). Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the number of prize balls is suppressed, that is, the speed at which prize balls are awarded is reduced, the present invention is not limited to this. By determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table for high ball state, which has a high determination rate of fluctuation patterns with a longer special symbol fluctuation time such as the fluctuation pattern of super reach than the ball state, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. It is also possible to lengthen the period until the ball is released, and to suppress the number of balls put out per unit time.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a pre-read preview performance for a form in which a fluctuation pattern can be determined using the high ball state fluctuation pattern determination table in the first high ball state and the second high ball state, the judgment When the remaining number of variable displays after judgment is still set to a value of 1 or more, if a pending memory of the variable display to be executed after the remaining number of variable displays after judgment becomes 0 occurs, the performance pattern of the pre-read preview effect. There is a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by (e.g., a variable display is executed depending on a fluctuating pattern of reach), there is a risk that the pre-read preview performance may become inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the above-mentioned feature section 162SG's prefetch notice setting process (see FIG. 14-23), if the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the prefetch limit, a prefetch notice effect is executed. By limiting this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a large difference between the variation pattern suggested by the performance pattern of the advance notice performance and the variation pattern actually selected in the variable display, thereby preventing the advance notice performance from being inappropriate. This can be prevented from happening.

Although not particularly shown in the feature section 162SG, the performance control CPU 120 refers to the value of the ball-out state flag for performance in the jackpot performance process shown in FIG. By selecting a process table for a fanfare performance according to the process timer and controlling the performance device according to the value of the process timer, the fanfare performance according to the ball release state can be executed.

Furthermore, although not particularly shown in the feature section 162SG, the production control CPU 120 refers to the value of the ball dispensing state flag for production in the ending production process shown in FIG. By selecting a process table for the corresponding ending effect and controlling the effect device according to the value of the process timer, the ending effect according to the ball release state can be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 162SG, the CPU 103 determines whether the ball output state is a low ball output state or a high ball output state by executing the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13. If it is determined that the ball output state is a high ball output state, the value of the ball output state flag is changed from "0" corresponding to a low ball output state to a high ball output state. By setting it to "1", which is a value corresponding to ) is now possible. Also, after setting the ball dispensing state flag to "1", the value of the ball dispensing state flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the variable display has been executed 100 times, that is, the ball dispensing state is set to high. By updating from the ball output state to the low ball output state, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during jackpot games will be returned to their original periods (ending the adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls per unit time) ). For this reason, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls paid out per unit time during the period of consecutive winnings, and it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high due to excessive prize balls being paid out in a short period of time. .

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when setting the value of the ball release state flag from "0" to "1", as shown in Figure 14-8, only the special figure variable display time of the non-reach variable pattern is By not prolonging the special feature variable display time of normal reach and super reach variation patterns, we are suppressing the increase in the amount of data related to variable display, and the variable display time of super reach and normal reach is extended. This prevents a decline in interest due to this.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, by setting the value of the ball dispensing state flag from "0" to "1", adjustment is started to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time, and the variable display is displayed 100 times. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls is completed by setting the value of the ball dispensing state flag to "0" again based on the execution, the present invention is not limited to this. Rather, for example, it is equipped with a timer that can measure time (e.g., a real-time clock or a timer), and based on the fact that the timer measures a certain period of time (e.g., 15 minutes, 30 minutes, etc.) from the start of the adjustment. The adjustment may then be completed. That is, the termination condition in the present invention may be that "a certain amount of time has elapsed during the consecutive winning state after the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball release state flag to "1".

Furthermore, in this feature section 162SG, an example is provided in which only one termination condition for terminating the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is that variable display is executed 100 times, The present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of termination conditions may be provided for terminating the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time. In addition, when setting multiple termination conditions for terminating the adjustment in this way, the adjustment may be terminated when any one of the termination conditions is satisfied, or the adjustment may be terminated when a plurality of termination conditions are satisfied. The adjustment may be ended.

Also, as shown in Figure 14-8, when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, the ball output state is the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state. state, the special figure variable display time in the fluctuation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" (when the ball output state is a low ball output state). Therefore, by lengthening the period required for the variable display, it is possible to lengthen the time interval until the variable display result becomes a jackpot during the consecutive game state, and the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state can be increased. It is possible to reduce the payout speed of prize balls during the period of consecutive winnings without reducing the speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 14-20 and 14-21, during a jackpot game, if the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2", the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2". The fanfare performance period, the interval period, and the ending performance period during which the game ball cannot enter the grand prize slot are set longer than when "0" is set as ``0''. For this reason, it is possible to prevent a game ball from entering the jackpot between each round game during a jackpot game without reducing the number of game balls that can win a prize during each round game according to the value of the ball dispensing state flag. The period can be lengthened, and the payout speed of prize balls per unit time during the consecutive winning state can be reduced.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2", the jackpot game is more likely to be played than when the value of the ball release state flag is set to "0". Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the ball release state flag may be "1" or "1". If "2" is set, any one of the fanfare performance period, interval period, ending performance period during the jackpot game will be more effective than when "0" is set as the value of the ball release state flag. The two periods may be made longer.

Furthermore, in this feature section 162SG, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game are gradually lengthened by updating the value of the ball release state flag from 0 → 1 → 2. Although this invention is not limited to this example, for example, when the value of the ball release status flag is updated from "0" to "1", the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period are updated. If any one or two of the periods are lengthened and the value of the ball release state flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining period may be lengthened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main process when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the recovery condition is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag as low ball output. Since "0" corresponding to the state is set, it is possible to prevent an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time from the time the pachinko game machine 1 is started up. Furthermore, if the recovery upper limit is established, that is, if a power outage occurs and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted, "1" or "2" will be set as the value of the ball dispensing state flag at the time of the power outage. If it has been set, the CPU 103 will set the value of the ball dispensing state flag to "1" or "2" again, so the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls should be made from the moment the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from the power outage. Can be restarted.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage, if the value of the ball dispensing state flag is set to "1" or "2" at the time of the power outage, the CPU 103 will issue a ball. Although we have illustrated a mode in which the value of the status flag is set to "1" or "2" again, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage, The value of the status flag may be set to "0", that is, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls that was being executed at the time of the power outage may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored as backup data when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 determines that the ball is in a high ball state in the ball state determination process, the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 starts lighting up under the control of the CPU 103. By lighting the high ball state notification LED 162SG071, it can be recognized from outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 that the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls is being performed.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, a mode in which the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 can be turned on under the control of the CPU 103 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the high ball state notification LED 162SG071 is controlled by the production control. It may be an LED that can be turned on under the control of the CPU 120. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU 103) can transmit control information (performance control command) that can specify whether or not the high awarding state is present to the performance control means (performance control CPU 120). The production control means should include a notification means (high ball state notification LED 162SG071) capable of informing that the high award state is controlled in response to identifying the high award state from the control information. Bye.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, a form is illustrated in which a high ball state notification LED 162SG071 is provided as a notification means that can notify that it is determined to be a high award state (high ball state) according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification means may include a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) that notifies by outputting a specific sound that the high ball state is determined, and a high ball state. An image display means (for example, image display device 5) that notifies that the determination has been made by displaying a specific image, and an information output means that can output information (signal) corresponding to the fact that the high ball output state has been determined. etc. may be used.

In addition, the control cycle for turning on and off the high ball status notification LED 162SG071 is the same as the control cycle for turning on and off the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. Then, the CPU 103 can perform notification by the high ball status notification LED 162SG071 using the same lighting/extinguishing control as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. It becomes.

In addition, the CPU 103 performs the production control board 12 (production control It is possible to send a ball dispensing state designation command to the CPU 120). Then, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 and 14-28, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the ball release state from the received ball release state designation command in the preview performance determination process, and changes the ball release state to the specified ball release state. It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance during variable display and the performance type of the preview performance to be executed using a corresponding table for determining the type of preview performance. In particular, in this feature section 162SG, a preview performance (notice performance type) that can be executed respectively when the ball output state is a low ball output state, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, and when the ball output state is the second ball output state. Since the numbers are different, it is possible to improve the game's interest by executing preview performances according to these ball placement states.

In addition, in this characteristic part 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-28, when the ball output state is a low ball output state, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, and when the ball output state is the second ball output state, the execution is performed respectively. Although possible preview performances (notice performance types) have been illustrated as examples, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the ball output state is a low ball output state and when the ball output state is a first high ball output state. , when the ball is in the second ball output state, the executable preview effects (preview effect types) may be the same, but the determination ratios for each preview effect type may be different, and if the ball release state is low Regardless of whether the ball is in the ball state, the first high ball state, or the second ball state, the determination ratio of the executable preview performance (preview performance type) and each preview performance type is the same. There may be.

In addition, this feature section 162SG makes it possible to execute a preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display, and exemplifies a form in which the type of executable preview performance is different depending on the ball release state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, during a jackpot game, there may be a probability change suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot game will be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game, or if the jackpot game continues for up to 10 rounds during a jackpot game. A continuation suggestion performance etc. that suggests continuation can be executed in multiple performance types, and when the ball output state is a low ball output state, when it is a first high ball output state, and when it is a second high ball output state. Depending on the case, the determination ratio of the type of performance that can be executed as the variable suggestion performance or the continuous suggestion performance and the type of performance that can be performed may be changed depending on the case.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-23, the performance control CPU 120 can display the pending display of the new pending memory generated due to the starting prize in a plurality of display patterns by executing the prefetch notice setting process. A pre-read preview performance can be executed, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is varied depending on which display pattern the pending display is displayed. Furthermore, in this feature section 162SG, the performance control CPU 120 does not perform the prefetch preview performance (changes the pending display to normal white) if the remaining number of variable displays after determination is equal to or less than the prefetch limit number in the prefetch preview setting process. (displayed with a blank ○), so if the pre-reading notice performance is executed for the pending memory that occurred at the start winning in the first high ball state or the second high ball state, the corresponding pre-reading It is now possible to prevent the advance preview performance from becoming inappropriate due to the ball output state changing to a low ball output state before the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of the preview performance starts. It has become.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, if the number of variable display remaining after determination is equal to or less than the pre-read limit number of times, a pre-read preview effect is executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the pre-reading preview effect is not executed when the ball payout state is the first high ball payout state or the second high ball payout state. You can do it like this.

Although the characteristic parts of this invention have been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of this invention are included in this invention. It will be done.

For example, in the feature section 162SG, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game are set for a longer period than when the ball output state is a low ball output state. At the same time, adjustments were made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time by lengthening the special figure variable display time of some variable patterns, but this invention is not limited to this. , as modification 162SG-1, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the determination ratio of probability variable jackpot A as the jackpot type is lowered than when the ball output state is a low ball output state, and the determination ratio of probability variable jackpot B is lowered. The determination ratio may be increased. By doing this, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the jackpot type is more likely to be determined as variable probability jackpot B where the number of rounds is 5 rounds, and the probability variable jackpot A where the number of lands is 10 rounds. Since it becomes difficult to determine, the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game can be reduced, and as a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball state.

Furthermore, as modification example 162SG-2, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variation) than when the ball output state is a low ball output state. By lowering the determination ratio of jackpot C) and increasing the determination ratio of non-probability variable jackpots, it may be possible to easily control the time saving state (low probability high base state) after the end of the jackpot game. By doing this, in the time saving state (low probability high base state), the percentage of variable display results becoming jackpots is lower than in the variable probability state (high probability high base state), so as a result, 100 times in the time saving state By executing the variable display, it becomes easier to determine the end of the consecutive game state and control to the normal state, which reduces the number of consecutive jackpot games through the high base state. Adjustments can be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the ball-out state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determining means" in this invention is the process of steps 162SGS190 to 162SGS194 (the process of determining the value of the time-saving counter and the process of determining the value of the time-saving counter) in the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. This corresponds to the part that executes the process of subtracting the value of the number of times counter, the process of rejudging the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction, the process of turning off the time saving flag.

In addition, the CPU 103 of the feature section 162SG changes the gaming state from the time saving state (low probability high base state) to the normal state (low probability low Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the CPU 103 controls the high base state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state) as an example. state), a high base state falling lottery (end lottery) is executed each time variable display is started in special symbol normal processing or variable display is ended in special symbol stop processing, and in this lottery Based on the fact that the player has won, the player may be controlled to a high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) or low probability low base state, that is, the consecutive winning state may be terminated. In addition, in the case where the falling lottery is executed every time the variable display starts or ends the variable display, for example, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the ball output state is a low ball output state. It is only necessary to make it easier for people to win the falling lottery at a higher rate than in the case of the lottery. By doing this, it becomes easier to determine the end of the consecutive winning state in the high ball winning state and control it to the normal state, thereby reducing the number of consecutive jackpot games that occur through the high base state. As a result, it is possible to realize an adjustment that reduces the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determining means" of the present invention is a process for executing a falling lottery when the CPU 103 starts variable display in the special symbol normal process or when executing the special symbol stop process. This corresponds to the process of turning off the probability change flag and time saving flag when the lottery is won.

Further, in the feature section 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball release state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on the condition that the variable display has been executed 100 times. The first high ball state and the second high ball state are changed to the low ball state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball state and the second high ball state. Although the form of control has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball release state flag to "1" and then controls the state of successive winnings. Based on the execution of a predetermined number of jackpot games (for example, 10 times) during the period, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0", that is, the "end condition" in this invention is set to "ball output state flag". may be set to ``1'' and then execute a predetermined number of jackpot games during the consecutive winning state. By doing so, the CPU 103 determines that the number of executions of the jackpot game executed after setting the value of the ball output state flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), which is the number of ending times. Basically, the value of the ball release state flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

Further, in the feature section 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball release state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on the condition that the variable display has been executed 100 times. The first high ball state and the second high ball state are changed to the low ball state on the condition that the variable display is executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball state and the second high ball state. Although the form of control has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification example 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball-out state flag to "1" and then controls the state of consecutive winnings. The value of the ball output status flag is set to "0" based on the total number of game balls that entered each winning slot or game balls that entered the out slot during the period reached a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls). In other words, the "end condition" in this invention is "the number of game balls used in the game during the consecutive game state after setting the value of the ball release state flag to "1" has reached a predetermined number. ”. By doing this, the CPU 103 can issue a ball based on the number of game balls used in the game reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls) after setting the value of the ball release status flag to "1". The value of the ball status flag can be reset from "1" or "2" to "0" again.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, if the value of the ball release state flag is "1" (first high ball release state) or "2" (second high ball release state), special figure variable display in each variation pattern Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the adjustment is performed to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball output state by prolonging the time, the present invention is not limited to this, and the adjustment can be made according to the value of the ball release state flag. Adjustments may be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball state by varying the determination ratio of each variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-30 and 14-31 as modified example 162SG-5, a fluctuation pattern for missing when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (low ball output state) Judgment table A, fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure when the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "1" (first ball dispensing state), and fluctuation pattern judgment table B for when the value of the ball dispensing state flag is "2" (second ball dispensing state). ) are provided respectively.

As shown in FIG. 14-30(A), in the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, out of the possible range 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, 1 to 600 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. -1, 601 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 14-30(B), in the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table B, out of the possible range of 1 to 997 of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, 1 to 400 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. -1, 401 to 800 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in FIG. 14-30(C), in the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table C, out of the possible range of 1 to 997 for the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, 1 to 200 are non-reach variation patterns PA1. -1, 201 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 are assigned to the super reach variation pattern PA2-2.

Here, when comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table A for a loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table B for a loss, the fluctuation pattern determination table B for a loss has a higher proportion of non-reach fluctuation patterns determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table A for a loss. While the rate is low, the rate at which the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach are determined is set high. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure is a fluctuation pattern determination table in which a fluctuation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure.

Furthermore, when comparing the fluctuation pattern determination table B for a loss and the fluctuation pattern determination table C for a loss, it is found that the fluctuation pattern determination table C for a loss has a higher proportion of non-reach fluctuation patterns than the fluctuation pattern determination table B for a loss. Although it is low, the rate at which the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach are determined is set high. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination table C for failure is a fluctuation pattern determination table in which a fluctuation pattern with a longer variable display time is more likely to be determined than the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure.

In other words, among these fluctuation pattern determination table A, fluctuation pattern determination table B, and fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and the fluctuation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time. A has the shortest average variable display time.

As shown in FIG. 14-31, if the variable display result is a loss when the value of the ball release state flag is "0", select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and change the fluctuation pattern. If the variable display result is a failure when the value of the ball output state flag is "1," select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, determine the fluctuation pattern, and change the value of the ball output state flag. If the variable display result is an error when the value is "2", it is sufficient to select the error variation pattern determination table B and determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table according to the value of the ball output state flag, it is possible to perform an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, the "advantageous state" in the present invention is a jackpot gaming state, and based on the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been controlled a specific number of times (5 times in the feature section 162SG) during the period of the consecutive winning state. Although we have illustrated the form in which the value of the ball release state flag is set from "0" to "1", this invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in this invention includes a small winning game state. But that's fine. In particular, this invention can be frequently controlled to a small winning game state during a consecutive game state, and has a game feature in which prize balls are paid out by landing a game ball in a big winning opening in these small winning gaming states. When applied to machines (so-called small winning rush machines), the total number of times the machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and the number of times it is controlled to the small winning gaming state during the consecutive winning state is a specific number (for example, 100 By setting the value of the ball dispensing state flag from "0" to "1" based on the fact that the number of times) has been reached, it is possible to realize an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball dispensing state.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, when the jackpot game state is controlled to be a non-probable variable jackpot, the time saving control is executed 100 times in the variable display after the jackpot game. The present invention is not limited to this, and a non-probable variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of times the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game is less than 100 times (for example, 50 or 30 times). In addition, when providing non-probable variable jackpots such as the number of times of time saving control such as 50 or 30 times, the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2" (high ball output state). After the execution of the non-probable variable jackpot game, when the variable display of the number of times of time saving control is executed according to the non-probable variable jackpot, the variable display is executed 100 times after the value of the ball release state flag is set to "1". Even if not, the value of the ball release state flag may be set to "0". In other words, if you win a non-probable variable jackpot in a consecutive winning state, and if you do not win a jackpot and return to a normal state in the time-saving state after the end of the non-probable variable jackpot game, you will be in the normal state. Based on this, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball state may also be completed.

Further, in this specification, both a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of feature section 109SG is applied and a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of feature section 162SG is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. Both the invention of the feature section 109 and the invention of the feature section 162SG may be applied to one pachinko gaming machine.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 5... Image display device 9... Game effect lamp 9B1... Lever lamp 9B2... Button lamp 9C... Upper frame lamp 9M... Left frame lamp 9N... Right frame lamp 11... Main board 12... Performance control board 31A... Stick Controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Microcomputer for game control 120...CPU for production control
131... Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
An operation means that can be operated by a player;
A production control means capable of executing production;
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled,
A specific performance can be executed after starting the reach performance,
The operating means is operated at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed, and a second timing before the start of the variable display at which the ready-to-reach effect is executed. It is possible to perform a predetermined vibration production that vibrates,
It is possible to execute a special vibration performance in which the operating means is vibrated during a specific performance period that is an execution period of the specific performance,
The special vibration performance can be performed at a third timing during the specific performance period and at a fourth timing after the third timing during the specific performance period,
As the special vibration performance,
A first special vibration performance that corresponds to the operation of a performance movable body different from the operating means can be executed during the specific performance period,
A second special vibration performance corresponding to the image display can be executed during the specific performance period,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed,
The predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance include a first performance mode and a second performance mode as common performance modes,
When the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the first timing, the rate at which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher when it is executed in the second effect mode than when it is executed in the first effect mode. is high,
When the special vibration effect is executed at the third timing, the rate at which the special vibration effect is controlled to be in the advantageous state is higher when executed in the second effect mode than when executed in the first effect mode. is high,
It is more advantageous when the predetermined vibration effect is executed in the first effect mode at the first timing than when the special vibration effect is executed in the second effect mode at the third timing. It is highly controlled by the state;
The predetermined vibration performance and the first special vibration performance are different in form ,
The predetermined vibration performance and the second special vibration performance are different in form ,
The first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance have different aspects ,
The performance control means is
When the player's operation on the operation means is not valid, the player's line of sight is different from the manner in which the player's operation on the operation means is prompted when the player's operation on the operation means is valid. It is possible to perform a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the user to the operating means,
It is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the operation means emits light,
varying the light emission mode in the light emission effect depending on the timing of vibrating the operating means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images